JP7043636B1 - Game table - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game table having a feature in a display for management. SOLUTION: The game table includes a display means, a door body which is provided on the front surface of the game table and can be opened and closed, a detection means which can detect an open / closed state of the door body, and an operation means, and the door. When the body is open and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, the display of the management display cannot be started, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state. In the state, even if a certain operation is performed on the operation means, the display of the management display cannot be started, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the detection state. Even in the open detection state, in the state where the game medium is inserted, the display of the management display cannot be started even if a certain operation is performed on the operation means. [Selection diagram] FIG. 21.

Description

The present invention relates to a game console represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

Conventionally, there is a game table that can display a management display for a game store administrator (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-296354

However, there is room for improvement in the management display of the conventional game table.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table having a characteristic display for management.

The game console according to the present invention includes a display means, a door body that is provided on the front surface of the game table and can be opened and closed, a detection means that can detect the open / closed state of the door body, and an operation means. The detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means in which the door body is in the open state. In addition, it is a means capable of changing the detection state to the open detection state, and by performing a predetermined operation regarding the detection means, the detection state of the detection means can be changed even if the door body is in the open state. The display means is configured to be in a closed detection state, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection. In the state, when a certain operation is performed on the operating means, the management display can be started to be displayed, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state. In the above operation means, even if the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display cannot be started, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the detection state. Even in the open detection state, in the state where the game value is input, the display of the management display cannot be started even if the certain operation is performed on the operation means. When the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state and the management display is displayed, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state. The game console is characterized in that the management display can be continuously displayed even when the operation is not performed on the operation means .

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic display for management.

It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a front view in the state which the front door of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention is opened. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. (A) It is a volume setting value table which shows an example of the setting value of the volume setting. (B) It is a use table which showed an example of use of a sound output means and an optical output means. (C) A light amount setting value table showing the relationship between the set value of the light amount setting and the duty ratio (luminance). (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st sub-control unit main processing. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a command reception interrupt process. (C) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of 1ms timer interrupt processing. (D) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the 10ms timer interrupt processing. (E) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of DMA interrupt processing. (A) It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the player setting screen display processing. (B) It is a flowchart which showed the flow of a sound control loop processing. (C) It is a flowchart which showed the flow of a sound driver processing. (D) It is a flowchart which showed the flow of volume switch processing. (A) It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the administrator set value control process. (B) It is a flowchart which showed the flow of volume value change processing. It is a figure which showed an example of the conventional volume setting method in chronological order. (A) It is a figure which showed the volume setting method which concerns on Example 1 in time series. (B) It is a figure which showed the volume setting method which concerns on Example 1-2 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the conventional volume setting method in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the volume setting method which concerns on Example 2 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the volume setting method which concerns on Example 3 in time series. It is a figure which showed the volume setting method which concerns on the modification of Example 3 in time series. It is a figure which showed the volume setting method which concerns on Example 4 in time series. It is a figure which showed the volume setting method which concerns on Example 5 in time series. (A) It is a figure which showed the volume setting method which concerns on Example 6 in time series. (B) It is a figure which showed the volume setting method which concerns on Example 7 in time series. It is a figure which showed the outline of the invention 5 of this application. It is a figure which showed the outline of the invention 6 of this application. (A) It is a figure which showed the example which started the display for an administrator by turning on a specific operation means in the opening state of a door body, and the detection state of a detection means is an open detection state, in chronological order. (B) It is a figure which showed the example in chronological order that the display for an administrator is not started when a specific operation means is turned on when the door body is open and the detection state of a detection means is a closed detection state. (C) When the door body is open and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state and the management display is displayed, a predetermined operation is performed, and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state. However, it is a figure which showed the example in which the management display is continuously displayed in chronological order. (D) In a state where the door body is open and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state and the management display is displayed, the management display is continuously displayed even if the predetermined operation is canceled. It is a figure which showed the example in chronological order. (E) In a state where the door body is open and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state and the game can be started, even if a certain operation is performed on the operation means, the display of the management display is started. It is the figure which showed the example which cannot be done in chronological order. (F) In a state where the door body is open and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state and the game can be started, when a certain operation is performed on the operation means, the display for management can be started. It is the figure which showed the example in time series. (G) When a certain operation is performed on the operating means in the state where the door body is open and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state and the display related to the door opening is displayed, the management display is displayed. It is a figure which showed the example which starts the display in chronological order. (H) When the door body is open and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state and the management display is displayed, the power is turned off and a certain operation is performed during the period when the power is off. It is a figure which showed the example in chronological order that at least a part of the management display which was displayed before the power is turned off is displayed when the power is turned on even when it is released. .. (I) It is a figure which showed the example which started the display for management by the operation by a plurality of specific operation means in chronological order. (J) It is a figure which showed the example which started the display of a plurality of kinds of management displays by the operation by a plurality of specific operation means in chronological order. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). (A) It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, the payout (number of grants) of each winning combination, and the remarks. (B) It is a figure which shows the type of a normal push order bell and a privilege push order bell, and the payout corresponding to each push order. (A) It is a figure which shows typically the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the transition of the gaming state of a slot machine 100. (A) It is a figure which showed the relationship between the navigation compliance rate in the first chance state, and the winning probability of a transition lottery. (B) It is a figure which showed the relationship between the navigation compliance rate in the second chance state, and the winning probability of a transition lottery. (C) It is a figure which showed the relationship between the navigation compliance rate in the AT state, and the winning probability of a set continuation lottery. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of various navigations in a non-AT state. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of various navigations in an advantageous section (non-AT state). (C) It is a figure which showed an example of various navigations in an advantageous section (AT state). It is a figure which showed the display example of the navigation count counter. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the execution period and the non-execution period of the navigation. It is a figure which showed an example of (b)-(e) various notifications. (A) It is a figure which showed the mode in a normal state, and an example of the count value of the navigation count counter 2 corresponding to each mode. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the navigation compliance rate and the lottery value of each mode. It is a figure which showed the modification of the display of the navigation count counter. It is a figure which showed the transformation example of the execution period of a navigation system. It is a figure which showed the modification of the navigation. (A) It is a figure which showed the modification of the AT state. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the AT end screen displayed in the AT extension period. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). (A) It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, the payout (number of grants) of each winning combination, and the remarks. (B) It is a figure which shows the type of a normal push order bell and a privilege push order bell, and the payout corresponding to each push order. (A) It is a figure which showed the transition example of the game state of the AT system. (B) It is a figure which showed the specific example of advantageous section control (1) at the time of ignoring operation navigation. (C) It is a figure which showed the specific example of advantageous section control (2) at the time of ignoring operation navigation. (A) It is a figure which showed the specific example of advantageous section control (3) at the time of ignoring operation navigation. (B) It is a figure which showed the specific example of the ending when the operation navigation was ignored. (C) It is a figure which showed the specific example of the bell hitting production. It is a figure which showed the specific example of advantageous section control (4) at the time of ignoring operation navigation. It is a figure which showed the specific example of (A), (B) advantageous section control (5) at the time of ignoring operation navigation. (C) It is a figure which showed the example which performed the three-card betting game in the AT state in time series. (D) It is a figure which showed the example which performed the two-card betting game in the AT state in time series. (A) It is a figure which showed the modification 1 of the advantageous section control at the time of ignoring the operation navigation. (B) It is a figure which showed the modification 2 of the advantageous section control at the time of ignoring the operation navigation.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment 1]
The slot machine of the present embodiment starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if they do not match, the game medium is used. It is a game table that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which multiple types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit of this optical sensor is provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114.

For example, the notification lamp 123 informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in the winning combination internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp to inform you. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment is lit until the bonus game is completed after the bonus notification of notifying the confirmation of the bonus. The notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. .. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation may be referred to as a third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 as a stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is called "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can grasp that the high navigation state is in the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is in front of the slot machine 100 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding a stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

It should be noted that the device may be configured to be capable of displaying various production images and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 are designed to notify predetermined information by causing the lamps to emit light, but the notification mode is not limited to the light emission of the lamp. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a slot machine having a full liquid crystal display, an area near reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when it is described as lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190, it is intended to include notification by another effect device (for example, a display device or the like) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 in a state where the front door 102 is opened. The main body 101 is a box body that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that houses the main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided at the upper part of the back plate 242, and the main control board storage case 210 Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. The side plate 260 on the left side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, the side plate 260 on the left side, houses the first sub control board that houses the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit. A case 220 is arranged. Further, an external centralized terminal plate 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is arranged on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power supply switch 244 is arranged on the front surface of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate in the closed state.

The power supply device 252 converts an AC power supply supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each into a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, and the like, which will be described later. It supplies to the control unit and each device. Further, a storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting the power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to the power cord 265 extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and the effect device 160 and the effect control board (illustrated) for controlling the effect device 160 are on the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 157. Omitted), the upper speaker 272 is provided. At the lower part of the liquid crystal display device 157, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like onto the medal tray 161 are provided. There is. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of an internal lottery for a winning combination, and a reel stop. ROM 306 for storing positions, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 every interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor or the like and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 starts when the power is turned on and the random number value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main process of the main control unit described later). To start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor to be paid out from the medal payout device 180, index sensor of reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 sensor are installed in the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect the input operation of the case. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, L Become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game medal insertion lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the display 126, the payout number display 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output. Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 has a voltage value of the power supply set to a predetermined value (this implementation). In the embodiment, when the voltage is less than 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. is doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a ROM 406 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like. It is provided.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and the speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via the output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is provided with various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input / output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to / from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and bases the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

[Embodiment 2]
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

In the second embodiment, in order to avoid duplicate explanations, in principle, only the configuration different from the game consoles according to the first to fourth embodiments will be described. Further, FIGS. 4 to 18 are used only for the description of the second embodiment in principle, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 4 to 18 are shown in the description of the second embodiment. The code shown in 18 has priority.

<Front door and open / close sensor>
First, the front door 102 described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2 and the open / close sensor for detecting the open / closed state of the front door 102 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front door 102 is a door body that is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. That is, the front door 102 is a door body that is provided on the front surface of the slot machine (game table) 100 and can be opened and closed. In this example, by inserting a key held by an administrator (for example, a clerk of a game store) into the door key hole 140, the front door 102 locked in the closed state can be opened. Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change from the closed state to the open state), but a person other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. ..

The side plate 260 on the right side of the main body 101 is provided with an optical sensor (open / close sensor; not shown) including a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and a front surface is provided between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the open / close sensor. It is configured to allow a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the door 102 to pass through.

The main control unit 300 monitors the state of various sensors 318 including the open / close sensor for each interrupt time. When the front door 102 is in the closed state and the light-shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting portion of the open / close sensor of the main body 101 is blocked, the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state. For example, a low level signal) is output to the main control unit 300.

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the light-shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting portion of the open / close sensor of the main body 101 is not blocked, the open / close sensor indicates the open detection state. A signal (for example, a high-level signal) is output to the main control unit 300.

That is, the open / close sensor is a detection means capable of detecting the open / closed state of the front door (door body) 102, and when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the detection state is in the closed detection state and the front door 102 is in the open state. In the case of, the detection state becomes the open detection state.

The "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to the optical sensor, and may be a magnetic sensor, a proximity switch, a micro switch, a Hall element, or the like. Further, it is not limited to the one in which the open detection state and the closed detection state are always switched according to the opening and closing of the door body, and even if the door body is in the open state, the detection state can be changed to the closed detection state. On the contrary, even if the door body is in the closed state, the detection state may be the one that can be changed to the open detection state.

Here, the open / close sensor according to this example is configured so that the detection state becomes the closed detection state even when the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state by performing a predetermined operation. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light-shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light-emitting part and the light-receiving part of the open / close sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like, and the main body is fixed. By blocking the light from the light projecting portion of the open / close sensor of 101, the detection state of the open / close sensor can be forcibly set to the closed detection state even when the front door 102 is in the open state.

The "predetermined operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and for example, a DIP switch for setting the open / close sensor to the closed detection state may be provided, and the DIP switch may be operated as a predetermined operation. Further, when the detection means is configured by a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the open / close sensor may be changed to the closed detection state by bringing the magnets close to each other.

The main control unit 300 reads the signal states of the various sensors 318 in the device monitoring process, and if an error is detected, executes the error process. In this example, in this device monitoring process, when the detection state of the open / close sensor of the main body 101 is in the open detection state, the front door opening error indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is detected. is doing.

When the main control unit 300 detects the front door opening error, the main control unit 300 transmits a command for notifying the occurrence of the front door opening error to the second sub control unit 500 via the first sub control unit 400. In the image control process, the second sub-control unit 500 executes a process of reading the effect data for performing image control regarding the front door opening error from the ROM 506 based on the received command. As a result, the front door opening error display (for example, the display including the character information such as "the door is open" shown in FIG. 9 and the like) is displayed in the display area of the effect image display device 157. That is, the effect image display device (display means) 157 can display the front door opening error display (certain error display) when the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state.

<Volume setting and light intensity setting>
Next, the volume setting and the light amount setting will be described with reference to FIG.

The slot machine 100 has a sound output means (for example, the speaker 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3) and an optical output means (for example, various lamps 420 shown in FIG. 3) as notification means capable of notifying game information and various errors. ), Display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), movable means (for example, shutter 163 shown in FIG. 1, reels 110 to 112) and the like.

Further, the slot machine 100 has a first operating means (for example, the administrator switch MSW shown in FIG. 17) and a second operating means (for example) used for changing the volume setting related to the sound output means and the light amount setting of the light output means. For example, the player switch PSW) shown in FIG. 17 is provided. That is, the game console (slot machine) according to the present invention includes a plurality of types of operating means including a first operating means and a second operating means, which are used for changing certain settings related to the notification means.

Here, the volume setting related to the sound output means includes, for example, the volume (sound pressure), sound quality, number of channels, frequency, etc. of the sound output from the sound output means, and the light amount setting of the optical output means includes optical output. The amount of light output from the means (duty ratio), color, brightness, time interval between lighting and extinguishing, etc. are included.

<Volume setting and light intensity setting / First operation method>
The "first operating means" according to the present invention is a means provided at a position where the front door (door body) 102 can be operated only in the closed state and the open state, for example. , Back knobs (rotary switches), slide switches, etc. used by managers (game store clerk, etc.). In this example, a rotary switch is adopted as the first operation means, and the administrator setting value (setting value of the first type) can be changed in 16 steps (scales 0 to F). That is, the setting value of the volume setting (certain setting) related to the sound output means includes an administrator setting value (first type setting value) that can be changed by operating the administrator switch MSW (first operating means). included.

When the main control unit 300 receives the operation of the administrator switch MSW, the main control unit 300 transmits a command including the administrator setting value to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 receiving the command sets the administrator. Depending on the value, the volume setting for the sound output means and the light amount setting for the light output means are set.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a command including the administrator set value to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 receiving the command is the administrator who received the command in the image control process. Based on the set value, the process of reading the effect data for displaying the administrator set value (displaying the set value of the first type) indicating the administrator set value (the set value of the first type) is executed from the ROM 506. .. As a result, the administrator setting value display (for example, the administrator setting value display MD shown in FIGS. 9A and 9A) is displayed in the display area of the effect image display device 157. That is, the effect image display device (display means) 157 can display a display (display of the set value of the first type) indicating the set value of the first type.

<Volume setting and light intensity setting / Second operation method>
The "second operating means" according to the present invention is a means provided at a position where the front door (door body) 102 can be operated even when the front door (door body) 102 is closed. A cross key having a button and an enter button, an effect button, a touch panel, and the like are applicable. In this example, the left and right buttons of the cross key are adopted as the second operation means, and the player setting value (second type setting value) can be changed in 16 steps (scales 0 to 15). .. That is, the setting value of the volume setting (certain setting) related to the sound output means includes the player setting value (second type setting value) that can be changed by operating the player switch PSW (second operation means). included.

When the main control unit 300 receives the operation of the player switch PSW, the main control unit 300 transmits a command including the player setting value to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 receiving the command sets the player. Depending on the value, the volume setting for the sound output means and the light amount setting for the light output means are set.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a command including the player set value to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 receiving the command receives the player in the image control process. Based on the set value, the process of reading the effect data for displaying the player set value (display of the second type of set value) indicating the player set value (the second type of set value) is executed from the ROM 506. .. As a result, the player set value display (for example, the player set value display PD shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (2)) is displayed in the display area of the effect image display device 157. That is, the effect image display device (display means) 157 can display a display (display of the second type of setting value) indicating the second type of setting value.

The first operating means and the second operating means according to this example are means used for changing both the volume setting and the light amount setting, but the first operating means and the second operating means according to the present invention. The operation means is not limited to this, and may be a means used for changing either the volume setting or the light amount setting, or for a setting other than the volume setting and the light amount setting (for example, a setting related to the display means). It may be the means used.

<Volume setting and light intensity setting / various tables>
FIG. 4A is a volume setting value table showing an example of the setting value of the volume setting. Further, FIG. 4 (b) is an application table showing an example of applications of the sound output means and the light output means, and FIG. 4 (c) shows the relationship between the set value of the light amount setting and the duty ratio (luminance). It is a light amount setting value table.

The method for measuring the volume specified in the volume setting value table is not particularly limited, but for example, a method for measuring the volume by attaching a microphone for measuring the volume to the center of the front of the slot machine 100, or an average method. Examples thereof include a method of measuring the volume by attaching it to a position close to the head of a tall player (a position about 700 mm above the seat).

The slot machine 100 changes the administrator setting value (first type setting value) by operating the administrator switch MSW, or changes the player setting value (second type setting value) by operating the player switch PSW. By changing, the volume setting related to the sound output means (in this example, the setting of the volume (sound pressure) of the sound output from the sound output means) and the light amount setting related to the light output means (in this example, from the light output means). It is possible to set the amount of light to be output (duty ratio).

The first sub-control unit 400 stores various tables shown in FIG. 4 in the ROM 406, and the administrator set value or the player set value received from the main control unit 300 and the set value defined in these various tables. Execute volume setting and light intensity setting based on.

In this example, as shown in the usage table of FIG. 4 (b), among the administrator setting values (0 to F), "5" to "F" are used for normal business use (normal mode), and "4". Is used for power saving mode A, "3" is used for power saving mode B, "1" and "2" are used for development and promotion, and "0" is used for application. ..

<Volume setting and light intensity setting / For normal business use (normal mode)>
When the administrator setting value is "F", the initial volume setting value is set to 8 and the initial sound pressure value is set to 93 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen (for example, the volume setting screen shown in FIGS. 8A and 8A), the player setting value of the volume is set to the scale 8 (sound pressure 93 dB) by default. In the figure, the default value of the scale (sound pressure) in each setting is surrounded by a thick frame. In the setting "F", the sound pressure can be adjusted at 1 dB intervals for each level of 85 dB to 100 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 15 of the player set value.

When the setting is "F", the initial value for setting the amount of light is set to "bright (duty ratio 100%)", which has the highest amount of light. The light intensity can be adjusted by selecting and confirming one of the rectangular images (dark, medium, bright) on the light intensity setting screen, and when the transition to the light intensity setting screen is performed, the player setting value of the light intensity is "bright" as the default. (Duty ratio 100%) ”is set.

When the administrator setting value is "E", the initial volume setting value is set to 8 and the initial sound pressure value is set to 86 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, the player setting value of the volume is set to the scale 8 (sound pressure 86 dB) by default. In the setting "E", the sound pressure can be adjusted at intervals of 1 dB for each level of 78 dB to 93 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 15 of the player set value. Further, the initial value of the light amount setting is the same as that of the setting "F".

When the administrator setting value is "D", the initial volume setting value is set to 8 and the initial sound pressure value is set to 79 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, the player setting value of the volume is set to the scale 8 (sound pressure 79 dB) by default. In the setting "D", the sound pressure can be adjusted at intervals of 1 dB for each level of 71 dB to 86 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 15 of the player set value. Further, the initial value of the light amount setting is the same as that of the setting "F".

When the administrator setting value is "C", the initial volume setting value is set to 8 and the initial sound pressure value is set to 72 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, the player setting value of the volume is set to the scale 8 (sound pressure 72 dB) by default. In the setting "C", the sound pressure can be adjusted at 1 dB intervals for each level of 64 dB to 79 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 15 of the player set value. Further, the initial value of the light amount setting is the same as that of the setting "F".

When the administrator setting value is "B", the initial volume setting value is set to 8 and the initial sound pressure value is set to 65 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, the player setting value of the volume is set to the scale 8 (sound pressure 65 dB) by default. In the setting "B", the sound pressure can be adjusted at intervals of 1 dB for each level of 57 dB to 72 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 15 of the player set value. Further, the initial value of the light amount setting is the same as that of the setting "F".

When the administrator setting value is "A", the initial volume setting value is set to 8 and the initial sound pressure value is set to 58 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, the player setting value of the volume is set to the scale 8 (sound pressure 58 dB) by default. In the setting "A", the sound pressure can be adjusted at 1 dB intervals for each level of 50 dB to 65 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 15 of the player set value.

When the setting is "A", the initial value for setting the light amount is set to "medium (duty ratio 70%)", which is lower than "bright (duty ratio 100%)". The light intensity can be adjusted by selecting and confirming one of the rectangular images (dark, medium, bright) on the light intensity setting screen, and when the transition to the light intensity setting screen is performed, the player setting value of the light intensity is "medium" as the default. (Duty ratio 70%) ”is set.

When the administrator setting value is "9", the initial volume setting value is set to 8 and the initial sound pressure value is set to 51 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, the player setting value of the volume is set to the scale 8 (sound pressure 51 dB) by default. In the setting "9", the sound pressure can be adjusted at 1 dB intervals for each level of 43 dB to 58 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 15 of the player set value. Further, the initial value of the light amount setting is the same as that of the setting "A".

When the administrator setting value is "8", the initial volume setting value is set to 8 and the initial sound pressure value is set to 44 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, the player setting value of the volume is set to the scale 8 (sound pressure 44 dB) by default. In the setting "8", the sound pressure can be adjusted at 1 dB intervals for each level of 36 dB to 51 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 15 of the player set value. Further, the initial value of the light amount setting is the same as that of the setting "A".

When the administrator setting value is "7", the initial volume setting value is set to 8 and the initial sound pressure value is set to 37 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, the player setting value of the volume is set to the scale 8 (sound pressure 37 dB) by default. In the setting "7", the sound pressure can be adjusted at 1 dB intervals for each level of 29 dB to 44 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 15 of the player set value.

When the setting is "7", the initial value of the light amount setting is set to "dark (duty ratio 40%)", which is lower than "medium (duty ratio 70%)". The light intensity can be adjusted by selecting and confirming one of a rectangular image (dark, medium, bright) on the light intensity setting screen, and when the transition to the light intensity setting screen is performed, the player setting value of the light intensity is "dark" as the default. (Duty ratio 40%) ”is set.

When the administrator setting value is "6", the initial volume setting value is set to 8 and the initial sound pressure value is set to 30 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, the player setting value of the volume is set to the scale 8 (sound pressure 30 dB) by default. In the setting "6", the sound pressure can be adjusted at intervals of 1 dB for each level of 22 dB to 37 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 15 of the player set value. Further, the initial value of the light amount setting is the same as that of the setting "7".

When the administrator setting value is "5", the initial volume setting value is set to 8 and the initial sound pressure value is set to 23 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, the player setting value of the volume is set to the scale 8 (sound pressure 23 dB) by default. In the setting "5", the sound pressure can be adjusted at 1 dB intervals for each level of 15 dB to 30 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 15 of the player set value. Further, the initial value of the light amount setting is the same as that of the setting "7".

As described above, when the administrator setting value is in the range of "5" to "F" for normal business, the lower the setting (closer to "5"), the volume set by default and the default volume. The set brightness becomes low.

In this example, in the normal business use (normal mode), the player setting value of the volume is set to the scale 8 as the default, but any one of the scales 0 to 7, 9 to 15 is set as the default. May be good. Further, an example is shown in which the player setting value of the volume is set to the default scale (8 in this example) when the screen is changed to the volume setting screen. For example, the player setting value is 10 and the volume is set. When the administrator setting value is changed from D to F while the setting screen is not displayed, immediately after the transition to the volume setting screen, the administrator setting value is F and the player setting value is immediately before. A sound pressure corresponding to 10 (95 dB in this example) is set, and when a predetermined time elapses, the administrator set value is F and the player set value corresponds to the default scale (8 in this example). It may be configured to be set to sound pressure (93 dB in this example).

<Volume setting and light amount setting / Power saving>
When the administrator setting value is "4", the operation mode is set to the power saving mode A, the volume cannot be set by the player, and the sound pressure is fixed at 60 dB. Further, when the administrator setting value is "4", it is impossible for the player to set the light amount, and the initial light amount setting value is the minimum brightness that can be set when the administrator setting value is "5" to "F". (That is, it is fixed to "extreme darkness (duty ratio 10%)" which is lower than "darkness (duty ratio 40%)" which is the minimum brightness that can be set by the player.

When the administrator setting value is "3", the operation mode is set to the power saving mode B, and the initial value of the sound pressure is further lower than the sound pressure of 60 dB when the administrator setting value is "4". It is set to 0 dB (silence). Further, even when the administrator setting value is "3", the volume setting by the player is impossible, and the sound pressure is fixed at 0 dB. Further, even when the administrator setting value is "4", it is impossible for the player to set the light amount, and the initial value of the light amount setting is the brightness "extremely dark (duty ratio 10)" when the administrator setting value is "4". It is fixed to "off (duty ratio 0%)" which is even lower than "%)".

As described above, in the power saving modes A and B, it is impossible for the player to set the volume and the amount of light. In this example, the power saving modes A and B are set by operating the administrator switch PSW, but the power saving modes are saved according to a predetermined operation such as confirmation of setting or change of setting of the slot machine 100 by a game clerk. The power modes A and B may be set.

<Volume setting and light intensity setting / for development and sales promotion>
When the administrator setting value is "2" (for development and sales promotion), the initial value of the volume setting is set to 2 and the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 70 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, the player setting value of the volume is set to the scale 2 (70 dB) by default. When the administrator setting value is "2", the sound pressure level that can be adjusted on the volume adjustment screen is different from any of the settings "5" to "F". Each of the scales 1 to 15 of the player set value corresponds to sound pressures of 64 dB, 70 dB, 74 dB, 77 dB, 80 dB, 83 dB, 86 dB, 87 dB, 88 dB, 89 dB, 90 dB, 91 dB, 92 dB, 93 dB and 94 dB. Further, the initial value for setting the amount of light is the same "bright (duty ratio 100%)" as the settings "B" to "F".

When the administrator setting value is "1" (for development and sales promotion), the initial volume setting value is set to 1 and the initial sound pressure value is set to 64 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, the player setting value of the volume is set to the scale 1 (64 dB) by default. The sound pressure corresponding to each of the scales 1 to 15 of the player set value and the initial value of the light amount setting are the same as when the administrator set value is "2".

<Volume setting and light intensity setting / for application>
When the administrator setting value is "0" (for application), the initial volume setting value is set to 0 and the initial sound pressure value is set to 0 dB. When the screen changes to the volume setting screen, the player setting value of the volume is set to the scale 0 (0 dB) by default. The sound pressure corresponding to each of the scales 1 to 15 of the player set value and the initial value of the light amount setting are the same as when the administrator set value is "2".

<Main processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 5A. Note that FIG. 5A is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit main process.

When a reset signal is input from a reset circuit (not shown), the first sub-control unit 400 starts resetting by reset interrupt and executes processing according to a control program stored in advance in ROM 406. First, in step S4001, the initial setting is performed. In this initial setting, the initial setting of the input / output port and the initialization processing of various variables (including the processing of initializing the variable CNT to 0, which will be described later) are performed.

In step S4003, it is determined whether or not the variable CNT stored in the RAM 408 is a predetermined value (33 in this example) or more, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S4005, and if not, the determination of step S4003. Repeat the process. Here, the variable CNT is a variable that is added every 1 ms in the 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. Therefore, in the process of determining whether or not the variable CNT is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (33 in this example) in step S4003, 33 ms has elapsed since the variable CNT was initialized to 0 in step S4001 or step S4005. It is synonymous with the process of determining whether or not. In step S4005, the variable CNT is initialized to 0, and then the process proceeds to step S4007. The process of step S4003 is not limited to this example, and may be configured to execute the main loop process (steps S4005 to S4023) three times in 100 ms (30 times per second).

In step S4007, the liquid crystal reception driver process is performed. In this liquid crystal reception driver processing, commands received from a liquid crystal control unit (control unit that controls the effect image display device 157) (not shown) are processed. In step S4009, the effect control driver process is performed. In this effect control reception driver processing, the processing of the command received from the second sub-control unit 500 and the like are performed.

In step S4011, the effect control main loop process is performed. In this effect control main loop process, the unprocessed command received by the command reception interrupt process described later is acquired from the command storage area provided in the RAM 408, the process corresponding to the unprocessed command is performed, and the predetermined effect execution timing is performed. Control lamps and sounds based on the data.

In step S4013, the lamp control main loop process is performed. In this lamp control main loop process, control related to the lamp is performed based on the lamp data set in the effect control main loop process in step S4011. In step S4015, the sound control main loop process is performed. In this sound control main loop process, control related to the sound (sound) is performed based on the sound data set in the effect control main loop process of step S4011.

In step S4017, the lamp driver process is performed. In this lamp driver process, the light output from the various lamps 420 is controlled based on the lamp control information set in the lamp control main loop process in step S4013. In step S40190, sound driver processing is performed. In this sound driver processing, the sound output from the speakers 272 and 277 is controlled via the sound source IC 418 based on the sound control information set in the sound control main loop processing in step S4015.

In step S4021, the liquid crystal communication driver process is performed. In this liquid crystal communication driver process, a process of transmitting a command to a liquid crystal control unit (not shown) is performed. In step S4023, the effect control unit communication driver process is performed. In this effect control communication driver process, the process proceeds to step S4003 after performing a process of transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 500 and the like.

The first sub-control unit 400 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S4003 to S4023 except for the command reception interrupt process, which will be described later, the 1 ms timer interrupt process, the 10 ms timer interrupt process, or the interruption due to the DMA interrupt process. ..

<Command reception interrupt processing>
Next, the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (b). Note that FIG. 5B is a flowchart showing the flow of the command reception interrupt process.

This command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub-control unit 400 triggered by a command reception interrupt generated when a command from the main control unit 300 is received. In step S4101, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and then the processing is terminated.

<1ms timer interrupt processing>
Next, the 1 ms timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (c). Note that FIG. 5C is a flowchart showing the flow of the 1 ms timer interrupt process.

The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt once every predetermined time (1 ms in this example), and executes the 1 ms timer interrupt process with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. do. In step S4201, the process ends after the process of adding 1 to the variable CNT provided in the RAM 406 is performed.

<10ms timer interrupt processing>
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (d). Note that FIG. 5D is a flowchart showing the flow of the 10 ms timer interrupt process.

The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt once every predetermined time (10 ms in this example), and executes the 10 ms timer interrupt process with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. do. In step S4301, the first sensor reading process is performed, and in the next step S4303, the process is terminated after the second sensor reading process is performed. Here, in the first sensor reading process, for example, a process of acquiring a detection signal of the shutter sensor 428 via the sensor circuit 426 (see FIG. 3) and storing the acquired detection signal in the RAM 408 is performed. Further, in the second sensor reading process, the detection signals of other switches are acquired and the acquired detection signals are stored in the RAM 408. <DMA interrupt processing>
Next, the DMA interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (e). Note that FIG. 5E is a flowchart showing the flow of the DMA interrupt process.

The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a DMA interrupt notifying the end of the DMA transfer, and executes the DMA interrupt process with the DMA interrupt as an opportunity. In step S4401, the processing is terminated after performing various processing associated with the termination of the DMA transfer.

<Volume setting screen display processing>
Next, the volume setting screen display process executed in the effect control main loop process (step S4011) in the first sub-control unit main process will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (a). Note that FIG. 7A is a flowchart showing the flow of the volume setting screen display process.

In step S4501, it is determined whether or not the volume setting screen display start condition is satisfied, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S4503, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4505. In step S4503, the process proceeds to step S4505 after starting the display of the volume setting screen. Here, the volume setting screen display start condition is, for example, a case where a specific operating means is operated during the demo display, a case where a specific operating means is operated other than during the jackpot game, and the like.

In step S4505, it is determined whether or not the volume setting screen display end condition is satisfied, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S4507, and if not applicable, the process ends. In step S4507, the process ends after the display of the volume setting screen is finished. Here, the volume setting screen display end condition is when a specific operating means is operated.

<Sound control main loop processing>
Next, the sound control main loop process (step S4015) in the above-mentioned first sub-control unit main process will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (b). Note that FIG. 7B is a flowchart showing the flow of sound control loop processing.

In step S4601, the sound data update process is performed. In this sound data update process, control such as playback and stop of the sound included in the effect set in the effect control main loop process, and processing such as fade-in, fade-out, and pan for the sound being reproduced are performed. Further, in the next step S4603, the volume switch process is performed. Details will be described later, but in this volume switch processing, volume change processing and the like are performed by the player switch PSW.

<Sound driver processing>
Next, the sound driver process (step S4019) in the above-mentioned first sub-control unit main process will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (c). Note that FIG. 7C is a flowchart showing the flow of sound driver processing.

In step S4701, the administrator set value control process is performed. Details will be described later, but in this administrator setting value control process, an administrator setting value update process and the like are performed. In step S4703, the process ends after performing other sound driver processes (initialization process of sound source IC418, diagnostic process, error processing, etc.).

<Volume switch processing>
Next, the volume switch process (step S4603) in the above-mentioned sound control main loop process will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (d). Note that FIG. 6D is a flowchart showing the flow of volume switch processing.

In step S4801, the volume value change process is performed. Details will be described later, but in this volume value change process, a volume change process or the like is performed by the administrator switch PSW. In step S1302, the processing is terminated after performing other volume switch processing.

<Administrator setting value control process>
Next, the administrator set value control process (step S4701) in the above-mentioned sound driver process will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (a). Note that FIG. 7A is a flowchart showing the flow of the administrator set value control process.

In step S5001, the current port value stored in the RAM 408 is saved to the previous port value stored in the RAM 408, and in step S5003, the signal output from the administrator switch PSW is read and set to the port value this time. do.

In step S5005, the current port value and the previous port value are compared, and if the values are the same, the process proceeds to step S5007, and if the values are different, the process proceeds to step S5013 to initialize the variable F_CNT to 0 and perform processing. finish. In step S5007, 1 is added to the variable F_CNT stored in the RAM 408, and in the next step S5009, it is determined whether or not the variable F_CNT is 15 or more. As a result of the determination, if the value is 15 or more, the value stored in the port value this time is stored in the administrator set value stored in the RAM 408 in step S5011, and the variable F_CNT is initialized to 0 in step S5013. And end the process.

<Volume value change processing>
Next, the volume value change process (step S4801) in the above-mentioned volume switch process will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (b). Note that FIG. 7B is a flowchart showing the flow of the volume value change process.

In step S4901, the detection signal of the administrator switch PSW is acquired, and the acquired detection signal is stored in the RAM 408 as the administrator setting value this time. In step S4903, it is determined whether or not the current administrator setting value acquired in step S4901 and the previous administrator setting value stored in the RAM 408 match, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step S4919, and if they match. To step S4905.

In step S4905, the above-mentioned player setting value is acquired, and in step 4907, 1 is set in the variable CH_CNT. In step S4909, the processing of the next steps S4911 to S4917 is repeatedly executed until the variable CH_CNT changes from 1 to 32.

In step S4911, it is determined whether or not there is a phrase being output in the channel (CH_CNT), and if there is, the process proceeds to step S4913, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4917. In step S4913, the volume of the channel (CH_CNT) is calculated, and in the next step S4915, the process of setting the volume of the channel (CH_CNT) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S4917. In step S4917, after adding 1 to CH_CNT, the process proceeds to step S4909.

In step S4919, by setting the administrator setting value this time to the previous administrator setting value, the process ends after the previous administrator setting value is updated.

<Conventional volume setting method>
Next, a conventional volume setting method will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of the conventional volume setting method in chronological order.

Here, the terms and phrases used in the following drawings will be supplementarily described. The "door body open state" indicates that the front door 102 is in the open state (open state), and the "door body closed state" indicates that the front door 102 is in the closed state (closed state). The "opening detection state" indicates that the detection state of the open / close sensor is the open detection state, and the "closed detection state" indicates that the detection state of the open / close sensor is the closed detection state.

Further, "BGM" is a sound output from a speaker (sound output means) 272,277 during execution of a certain effect, and "operation sound" is a speaker when a certain operation means is operated. (Sound output means) The sound output from 272,277, and the "error sound" is the sound output from the speaker (sound output means) 272,277 when a certain error occurs. ..

Further, the "cross key" is the above-mentioned first operating means (means provided at a position where the front door 102 can be operated only in the opened state of the closed state and the open state). The "back knob" is the above-mentioned second operating means (means provided at a position where the front door 102 can be operated even when the front door 102 is closed).

<Conventional volume setting method / first method>
FIG. 8A is a diagram showing the first method of the conventional volume setting methods in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 8A and 8A show a state in which the administrator changes the player setting value using the cross key while the front door 102 is in the door body closed state and the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state. .. When the front door 102 is opened in this state, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8 (2), the front door 102 shifts to the door body open state and the open / close sensor shifts to the open detection state, resulting in a front door opening error. .. Then, since the open / close sensor shifts to the open detection state and an error occurs in opening the front door, an error sound (in this example, a sound such as "the door is open") is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the effect image is produced. In the display area of the display device 157, a front door opening error display (display including character information such as "the door is open" in this example) is displayed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 8A and 8A indicate a state in which the administrator changes the administrator setting value using the back knob while the front door 102 is in the door body open state and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state. There is. When the front door 102 is closed in this state, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8 (4), the front door 102 shifts to the door closed state, the open / close sensor shifts to the closed detection state, and the speakers 272 and 277 BGM is output at a volume corresponding to the changed administrator setting value (3 in this example).

The following states shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (5) show a state in which the administrator changes the player setting value using the cross key while the front door 102 is in the door body closed state and the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state. It is in the same state as in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (1) above. Further, in the following states shown in FIGS. 8 (a), 8 (6) to (7), when the front door 102 is in the door body open state and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state, the administrator uses the back knob to set the administrator setting value. The changed state is shown, and it is the same state as in FIGS. 8 (a), (2) to (3) above.

In the game store, in order to check the volume setting of the game console, for example, after changing the administrator setting value by one step from the minimum value 0 (0 → 1), the player setting value is changed from 0 in ascending order. (0 →… → 8 → 9 →… → 15), after changing the administrator setting value by one step (1 → 2), change the player setting value from 0 in ascending order (for example, 0 →… → 8 → The operation of 9 → ... → 15) may be repeated until the administrator setting value reaches the maximum value F.

When performing such volume setting work, in the first method, since the administrator setting value cannot be changed (operation of the back knob) when the front door 102 is in the door body closed state, the front door 102 is used as the door body. It is necessary to shift to the open state, but since the player set value cannot be confirmed (displayed) in this door closed state, the player set value is set after the front door 102 is shifted to the door closed state again. It is necessary to change (operate the cross key). That is, in the first method, it is necessary to repeatedly open and close the front door 102 in the volume setting work, and there is a problem that the volume setting work takes time.

<Conventional volume setting method / second method>
FIG. 8B is a diagram showing the second method of the conventional volume setting methods in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 8 (b) and 8 (1) and 8 (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (1) and 8 (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

The open / close sensor according to this example is configured so that the detection state becomes the closed detection state even when the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state by performing a predetermined operation.

The state shown in FIGS. 8 (b) and 8 (3) shows a state in which the manager performs a predetermined operation while the front door 102 is in the door body open state and the open / close sensor is changed to the closed detection state. In this state, since the front door 102 is in the open state of the door but the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state, the administrator set value can be changed (operation of the back knob).

Therefore, in the second method, it is not necessary to repeatedly open and close the front door 102 in the volume setting work, and the volume setting work time is shortened as compared with the first method described with reference to FIG. 8 (a). be able to. Further, since the front door opening error can be canceled by a predetermined operation, the work can be performed efficiently without outputting an error sound or displaying the front door opening error display.

However, in the second method, in addition to eliminating the front door opening error display that separates the change of the administrator setting value (operation of the back knob) and the change of the player setting value (operation of the cross key), etc. Since the display of the volume setting screen is continued, there is a new problem that, for example, an operation error as shown in FIG. 8C occurs.

In the example shown in FIG. 8 (c), in order to confirm the volume setting of the game console, the administrator setting value is changed by one step from 3 (3 → 4), and then the player setting value is changed from 0 in ascending order. (0 → ... → 8 → 9 →… → 15), I intend to check the changed volume, but as shown in FIGS. 8 (c) and 8 (6), change the player setting value due to an operation error. No, the administrator setting value is changed from 4 to 5.

In this way, the second method has advantages such as shortening the work time for volume setting, but it is possible to change the administrator setting value (operation of the back knob) and the player setting value (cross key). Since the delimiter of (operation) is unclear, there is a problem that an operation error is induced and one of the operations is skipped.

<Volume setting method of the present invention>
Next, the volume setting method of the present invention will be described.

<Volume setting method of the present invention / Example 1>
FIG. 9A is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to the first embodiment in chronological order.

Here, the terms and phrases used in the following drawings will be supplementarily described. The "administrator setting value" indicates an administrator setting value (first type setting value) that can be changed by operating the administrator switch MSW (first operating means), and the "player setting value" is a game. A player setting value (second type setting value) that can be changed by operating the person switch PSW (second operation means) is shown, and the "volume value" is output from the speaker (sound output means) 272,277. It shows the sound pressure of the sound.

Further, the "operating state" indicates the operating state (gaming state, etc.) of the slot machine 100, the "operation" indicates the content of the operation for a certain operation means or the front door 102, and the "display example" is the effect image. An example of the display content displayed in the display area of the display device (display means) 157 is shown.

In the states shown in FIGS. 9A and 9A, the administrator setting value is D and the player setting value is in the non-gaming state of the slot machine 100, the door body closed state of the front door 102, and the closing detection state of the open / close sensor. It is set to 10, and BGM (sound corresponding to the stopped effect in this example) is output from the speakers 272 and 277 at a volume corresponding to the administrator setting value and the player setting value (81 dB in this example). , The display area of the effect image display device 157 shows a state in which the stopped effect is displayed.

In the state shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (1), when an operation of a certain operation means (decision button; not shown) is accepted, the volume can be set by operating the player switch PSW. After the transition, the volume setting screen as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9A is displayed in the display area of the effect image display device 157. On the volume setting screen of this example, a display suggesting that the volume can be set (in this example, a display including character information such as "volume setting screen") and a player setting value display PD indicating the player setting value (in this example, the player setting value display PD ( In this example, a display including information on the player setting value such as "volume: 10") is displayed.

Further, since the volume can be set by operating the player switch PSW when the front door 102 is closed, when the operation of the right button of the player switch PSW is accepted, the player setting value is increased by one step. When the operation of the left button of the player switch PSW is accepted, the player set value is reduced by one step.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9A and 9A, since the operation of the right button of the player switch PSW is accepted, the player setting value is increased by one step from 10 to 11, and the speakers 272 and 277 are used. , BGM (sound corresponding to the stopped effect in this example) is output at a volume corresponding to the administrator set value and the player set value (82 dB in this example), and the display area of the effect image display device 157 is changed. Display indicating the later player setting value Displays the player setting value PD (in this example, the display including the information of the player setting value such as "volume: 11").

When the front door 102 is opened by the administrator in this volume settable state, the front door 102 shifts to the door body open state and the open / close sensor shifts to the open detection state as shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (4). , Front door opening error occurs. Then, since the open / close sensor shifts to the open detection state and an error occurs in opening the front door, an error sound (in this example, a sound such as "the door is open") is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the effect image is produced. In the display area of the display device 157, the front door opening error display ED (display including character information such as "the door is open" in this example) is overlapped and displayed before the display of the volume setting screen.

Here, in this example, in the state shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (2), the BGM is output at the volume corresponding to the administrator set value and the player set value (82 dB in this example), but FIG. 9 (a). ) In the state shown in (4), since the front door opening error has occurred, the volume of the error sound is set in advance instead of the volume corresponding to the administrator setting value and the player setting value (82 dB in this example). An error sound is output at the set volume (100 dB in this example). The volume of the error sound may be lower than the volume corresponding to the administrator setting value and the player setting value.

Further, in the state shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (4), the front door 102 is in the open state, and the volume can be set by operating the administrator switch (first operating means) MSW. An administrator setting value display MD (in this example, an icon imitating a speaker and a display including information on the administrator setting value such as "D") indicating the user setting value is displayed.

Here, in this example, in the door body closed state of the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 9A and 9A, only the player setting value display PD indicating the player setting value is displayed, whereas the figure shows the figure. 9 (a) In the door body open state of the front door 102 shown in (4), in addition to the player setting value display PD indicating the player setting value, the administrator setting value display MD indicating the administrator setting value is displayed. do.

Further, since the volume can be set by the administrator switch MSW in the door body open state of the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 9A and 9A, when the rightward rotation operation of the administrator switch MSW is accepted, When the administrator setting value is increased by one step and the left rotation operation of the administrator switch MSW is accepted, the administrator setting value is decreased by one step.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9A and 9A, since the rotation operation of the administrator switch MSW in the right direction is accepted, the administrator setting value is increased from D to F in two steps, and the effect image display device 157 is displayed. In the display area of, a display administrator setting value MD (in this example, an icon imitating a speaker and a display including information of the administrator setting value such as "F") indicating the changed administrator setting value is displayed. Even if the administrator setting value is changed, the error sound (100 dB in this example) is used as the error sound volume (100 dB in this example) during the period when the front door opening error occurs. Then, a voice such as "The door is open") is output.

On the other hand, in the door body open state of the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (4), the volume cannot be set by the player switch PSW. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (5), the player Even if the operation of the right button of the switch PSW is accepted, the player setting value is not changed, and the player setting value display PD indicating the player setting value is not changed.

<Volume setting method of the present invention / Example 1-2>
FIG. 9B is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to Example 1-22 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 9 (b) and 9 (1) are the same as those in FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the state shown in FIGS. 9 (b) and 9 (2), the front door 102 is opened by the administrator, the front door 102 is in the door open state, the open / close sensor is in the open detection state, and a front door open error occurs. Is.

As described with reference to FIG. 9 (a), in the closed state of the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 9 (b) and 9 (1), an operation of a certain operating means (decision button in this example; not shown) is performed. Is accepted, the volume can be set by operating the player switch PSW. In this example, the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 9 (b) and 9 (2) is in the open state. Since the operation means (decision button in this example; not shown) has been accepted, the volume setting is not possible.

On the other hand, in the door body open state of the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 9 (b) and 9 (2), the volume can be set by the administrator switch MSW. Therefore, in the example shown in FIGS. 9 (b) and 9 (4), the control is performed. The administrator setting value is increased by two steps from D to F based on the right rotation operation of the person switch MSW, and after the front door 102 shifts to the door closed state, FIG. 9B (b) ( As shown in 5), the BGM is output at a volume (95 dB in this example) corresponding to the administrator set value and the player set value. In the example shown in FIGS. 9 (b) and 9 (4), since the volume cannot be set, the administrator setting value is changed, while the display area of the effect image display device 157 is changed. The display showing the administrator setting value of is not displayed.

<Volume setting method of the present invention / Example 2>
Next, prior to the description of the volume setting method according to the second embodiment, the conventional volume setting method will be described in detail with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the conventional volume setting method in chronological order.

As described with reference to FIG. 8A, in the conventional volume setting method, the front door 102 is opened to change the administrator setting value, while the front door 102 is closed to set the player. Since it is necessary to change the value, it is necessary to repeatedly open and close the front door 102 in the volume setting work, and there is a problem that the volume setting work takes time.

For example, conventionally, when checking the volume setting of the game console at a game store, a certain operation means (in this example, a decision button) is used in the closed state of the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (1). The operation of (not shown) is performed to shift to the volume settable state shown in FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (2).

Then, in this volume settable state, as shown in FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (2) to (4), the right button of the player switch PSW is operated, and the volume is changed step by step while changing the player set value step by step. When the player set value reaches the upper limit value of 15, the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 10 (a), (5) to (6) is moved to the open state, and the administrator set value is set. Change only one step (C → D in this example).

Further, subsequently, in the closed state of the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 10A (7) to 10 (9), the right button of the player switch PSW is operated to change the player setting value one step at a time. While checking the volume, when the player set value reaches the upper limit value of 15, the front door 102 is moved to the open state of the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (10), and the administrator set value is set to 1. It is necessary to change only the stage (D → E in this example), and then repeat the change of the player setting value and the change of the administrator setting value (opening and closing of the front door 102) until the confirmation of the volume setting is completed. ..

In such a conventional volume setting method, it is necessary to repeatedly open and close the front door 102 in the volume setting work, which causes a problem that the volume setting work takes time, and an error occurs due to the opening and closing of the front door 102. Since the sound is output and the front door opening error display is displayed, there is a problem that the player is inconvenienced during business hours.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10B, originally, when the administrator setting value is E, it is necessary to check the volume while changing the player setting value from 8 to 15 step by step. Due to an operation error such as, the administrator setting value is changed in two steps (D → F in this example), and the volume of 87dB to 92dB corresponding to the administrator setting value E and the player setting values 9 to 15 is confirmed. I sometimes skipped it. That is, in the conventional volume setting method, since the division between the change of the administrator setting value and the change of the player setting value becomes unclear, there is a problem that an operation error is induced and one of the operations is skipped.

FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to the second embodiment in chronological order.

For example, when the administrator performs the volume setting work, the player is set by the operation by the player switch PSW when the front door 102 is in the door closed state and the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state as shown in FIG. 11 (1). The volume is checked while changing the value step by step, and when the player set value reaches the upper limit value of 15, the front door 102 is opened, and the front door 102 shown in FIG. 11 (2) is opened. The state and open / close sensor shifts to the open detection state.

In this example, a predetermined operation related to the open / close sensor (detection means) (in this example, an operation of inserting a light-shielding piece of a certain length between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the open / close sensor and fixing it with tape or the like). Since the detection state is configured to be the closed detection state even when the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 11 (2) is a door. When the administrator performs a predetermined operation while the front door 102 is open in the body open state and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 11 (3) is in the door open state and the open / close sensor. Transitions to the closed detection state.

In this state, since the front door 102 is in the door open state but the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state, the administrator set value can be changed by operating the administrator switch MSW.

According to this example, it is not necessary to repeatedly open and close the front door 102 in the volume setting work, and the volume setting work time can be shortened as compared with the conventional volume setting method described with reference to FIG.

Further, in this example, the administrator switch MSW is in a state where the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the open / close sensor detection state is in the closed detection state, and the volume setting screen (certain setting display) is displayed. When a certain operation is performed on (first operation means), the displayed volume setting screen (certain setting display) ends, but the front door opening error display (error display) is not displayed. It is configured.

Therefore, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state as shown in FIG. 11 (3), the administrator set value is increased by one step by the operation by the administrator switch MSW. As shown in FIG. 11 (4), the volume setting screen displayed when the front door 102 is in the door closed state and the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state is terminated, the front door 102 is in the door open state, and the open / close sensor is open. The front door opening error display that was displayed in the open detection state is not displayed.

Further, even when the front door 102 is in the open state and the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state as shown in FIG. 11 (7), the administrator set value is increased by one step by the operation by the administrator switch MSW. As shown in FIG. 11 (8), the displayed volume setting screen is closed, and the front door opening error display is not displayed.

As described with reference to FIGS. 8 (c) and 10 (b), in the conventional volume setting method, the division between the change of the administrator set value and the change of the player set value becomes unclear, so that the operation is performed. There is a problem that a mistake is triggered and one of the tasks is skipped, but according to this example, when a certain operation is performed on the administrator switch MSW, the displayed volume setting screen ends. It is possible to set the volume while accurately grasping that the setting value of the administrator setting value is changed, and it is possible to prevent an operation error. Further, since the front door opening error display is not displayed when a certain operation is performed on the administrator switch MSW, the visibility is not hindered by the front door opening error display, and the volume is increased. The setting work can be done efficiently.

Further, in this example, the player switch PSW is in a state where the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the open / close sensor detection state is in the closed detection state, and the volume setting screen (certain setting display) is not displayed. When a certain operation is performed on the (second operation means), the volume setting screen (a certain setting display) is displayed.

Therefore, when the front door 102 is operated by the player switch PSW while the front door 102 is in the open state and the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state as shown in FIG. 11 (4), as shown in FIG. 11 (5). The volume setting screen is displayed. Further, even when the front door 102 is in the open state of the door and the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state as shown in FIG. 11 (8), when the operation is performed by the player switch PSW, the following is shown in FIG. 11 (9). As shown, the volume setting screen is displayed.

In the conventional volume setting method, since the division between the change of the administrator setting value and the change of the player setting value becomes unclear, there is a problem that an operation error is induced and one of the operations is skipped. According to the example, when a certain operation is performed on the player switch PSW (to the second operating means), the volume setting screen is displayed, so that it is accurate that the setting value of the player setting value is changed. It is possible to set the volume while grasping it, and it is possible to prevent operation mistakes.

<Volume setting method of the present invention / Example 3>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to the third embodiment in chronological order.

In this example, in the first gaming state (for example, during non-game), both the administrator setting value and the player setting value can be changed, but the second gaming state different from the first gaming state is possible. In (for example, during a game), the administrator setting value can be changed, but the player setting value cannot be changed.

Therefore, in the first gaming state (during non-gaming in this example) shown in FIGS. 12A and 12A, the front door 102 is in the door body closed state and the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state. The player setting value can be changed by operating the player switch PSW. For example, as shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (2), the volume can be set by operating the determination button of the player switch PSW. As shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (3), the player setting value can be changed (10 → 11 in this example) by operating the right button of the player switch PSW.

Further, although not shown, in the first gaming state (during non-gaming in this example), when the front door 102 is in the door open state and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state, the administrator is operated by the administrator switch MSW. The set value can be changed.

On the other hand, in the second gaming state (during the game in this example) shown in FIGS. 12A and 12A, the player is in the state where the front door 102 is closed and the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state. The player setting value cannot be changed by operating the switch PSW. For example, even if the enter button of the player switch PSW is operated, the volume cannot be set.

Further, in the second gaming state (during the game in this example) shown in FIGS. 12 (b) and 12 (4), when the front door 102 is in the door body open state and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state, the administrator. The administrator setting value can be changed by operating the switch MSW. For example, as shown in FIGS. 12 (b) and 12 (4), the administrator setting value can be changed by rotating the administrator switch MSW to the right. (D → F in this example) can be performed.

According to this example, for example, in the second gaming state (in this example, during the game) in which the player setting value cannot be changed, as shown in FIGS. 12 (b) and 12 (2), the player performs the premier effect. If there is a request to detect that it will start and set the volume to the maximum volume to enjoy the effect, change the administrator setting value even in the second gaming state (in this example, playing). Is possible, so you can set your favorite volume by asking the administrator to set the volume, and you can increase the satisfaction of the player.

Further, even in the first gaming state where the player setting value can be changed (during non-game in this example), the volume is determined according to both the administrator setting value and the player setting value. By asking the administrator to set the volume, the desired volume can be set, and the satisfaction of the player can be enhanced.

The game console according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and both the administrator set value and the player set value may be changed in the second gaming state (for example, during a game). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to the modified example of the third embodiment in chronological order.

In this example, in the second gaming state (during the game in this example), when the front door 102 is in the door closed state and the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state, the player setting value can be changed by operating the player switch PSW. It is possible, for example, as shown in FIG. 13 (2), the volume can be set by operating the enter button of the player switch PSW, and as shown in FIG. 13 (3), the player switch PSW can be set. The player setting value can be changed (10 → 15 in this example) by operating the right button of.

Further, in the second gaming state (during the game in this example), when the front door 102 is in the door body open state and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state, the administrator setting value can be changed by operating the administrator switch MSW. Yes, for example, as shown in FIG. 13 (5), the administrator setting value can be changed (D → F in this example) by rotating the administrator switch MSW to the right.

Further, in this example, the administrator switch MSW is in a state where the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the open / close sensor detection state is in the open detection state, and the volume setting screen (certain setting display) is displayed. When a certain operation is performed on (the first operation means), the displayed volume setting screen (a certain setting display) is configured to end.

For example, when the front door 102 is in the open state of the door and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state as shown in FIG. 13 (4), the administrator set value is increased by one step by the operation by the administrator switch MSW. As shown in FIG. 13 (5), the displayed volume setting screen ends.

According to this example, after the volume is set by the administrator, the player can immediately enjoy the production at a desired volume, and the player's motivation to play can be enhanced.

<Volume setting method of the present invention / Example 4>
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to the fourth embodiment in chronological order.

In this example, when the front door 102 is in the open state of the door body and the detection state of the open / close sensor is in the open detection state, when a specific operation is performed, a system setting screen that allows various settings related to the game console is displayed. Has been done.

For example, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state as shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (3), a specific operation (in this example, the front door 102 can be operated even in the closed state). When the operation means provided at the position and the operation means provided at the position that can be operated only when the front door 102 is in the open state are simultaneously pressed), the system shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (3) is performed. The menu screen SD1 of the setting screen is displayed.

The menu screen SD1 of the system setting screen of this example has a volume setting menu that shifts to the volume setting screen, a power saving setting menu that shifts to the power saving setting screen, a time setting menu that shifts to the time setting screen, and an error history screen. It consists of an error history menu that migrates to.

When the volume setting menu is selected by the operation of the administrator switch PSW (in this example, the cross key or the like) on the menu screen SD1 of this system setting screen, the volume setting screen SD2 shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (4) is displayed. Is displayed.

The volume setting screen SD2 of this example is composed of a player-adjustable menu that allows the player to set the volume and a player-unadjustable menu that makes it impossible for the player to set the volume. When selected, the player setting value becomes invalid, and the volume of the speakers 272 and 277 is the volume corresponding to the administrator setting value (for example, if the administrator setting value is F, the volume is irrespective of the player setting value. The sound pressure is 93 dB) corresponding to the default value 8 of the player set value.

Further, in this example, the administrator switch MSW is in a state where the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the open / close sensor detection state is in the open detection state, and the light amount setting screen (certain setting display) is displayed. When a certain operation is performed on (the first operation means), the displayed light amount setting screen (a certain setting display) is configured to end.

In the state shown in FIGS. 14 (b) and 14 (1), the front door 102 is in the open door state and the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state by performing a predetermined operation while the front door 102 is open. It is a state. In this state, when the operation of the upper button or the lower button of the player switch PSW is accepted, the state shifts to the light amount settable state in which the light amount can be set, and the light amount setting screen LD is displayed.

Further, in the state where the light amount setting screen LD is displayed, when the operation of the upper button of the player switch PSW is accepted, the light amount is increased by one step, and when the operation of the lower button of the player switch PSW is received, the light amount is received. Is configured to decrease by one step, while the light intensity setting screen is erased when the operation by the administrator switch MSW is accepted, as shown in FIGS. 14 (b) and 14 (4).

According to this example, when an operation by the administrator switch MSW is accepted, the light intensity setting screen is erased even if the light intensity does not change due to the operation (for example, when the administrator setting value is changed from E to F). Therefore, when the administrator performs the work of setting the volume, the visibility is not impaired and the work efficiency can be improved. In addition, after the volume is set by the administrator, the player can immediately enjoy the production with the desired amount of light, and the player's motivation to play can be enhanced.

<Volume setting method of the present invention / Example 5>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to the fifth embodiment in chronological order.

In this example, when a specific operation is performed while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume setting screen is erased and a certain error display is displayed.

The state shown in FIGS. 15A and 15A is a state in which the player switch PSW is operated and the volume setting screen is displayed while the front door 102 is in the door open state and the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state. .. In this example, in the state where this volume setting screen is displayed, the specific operation (in this example, the operation means provided at the position where the front door 102 can be operated even when the front door 102 is closed and the front door 102 is in the open state). When the operation means provided at the position where the operation means can be operated at the same time is performed), the volume setting screen is erased and a certain error occurs as shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (5). The display (in this example, an error display including the characters "setting abnormality" indicating an abnormality in the volume setting) is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (2), when a specific operation is performed while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume setting screen is erased and the explanation is made with reference to FIG. 14 (a). The menu screen SD1 of the system setting screen may be configured to be displayed.

With such a configuration, after confirming the player setting value on the volume setting screen, for example, the menu screen SD1 of the system setting screen is shifted to the volume setting screen SD2 described with reference to FIG. 14 (a). Therefore, it is possible to immediately make a setting that makes it impossible for the player to set the volume, and the convenience can be enhanced.

<Volume setting method of the present invention / Example 6>
FIG. 16A is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to the sixth embodiment in chronological order.

In this example, the volume of the payout sound can be adjusted during the medal payout operation, but the volume of the checkout sound cannot be adjusted during the medal checkout operation.

Here, the payout operation is an operation of paying out medals from the medal payout device 180 shown in FIG. 2 when a winning combination with payout is won, and during this payout operation, the speakers 272 and 277. Outputs the payout sound from. Further, the settlement operation means that when the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 1 is pressed, the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the bet medals are settled, and the medals are settled from the medal payout outlet 155 shown in FIG. It is an operation of discharging, and during this settlement operation, a settlement sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The states shown in FIGS. 16A and 16A show a state in which the administrator switch MSW is operated during the payout operation and the administrator set value is increased by two steps from D to F. .. In this example, since the volume of the payout sound can be adjusted during the payout operation of the medal, the volume of the payout sound is increased from 81 dB to 95 dB.

Further, the states shown in FIGS. 16A and 16A show a state in which the administrator switch MSW is operated during the settlement operation and the administrator set value is increased by two steps from D to F. ing. In this example, since the volume of the settlement sound cannot be adjusted during the settlement operation of the medal, the volume of the settlement sound is maintained at 100 dB before and after the operation by the administrator switch MSW.

<Volume setting method of the present invention / Example 7>
FIG. 16B is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to the seventh embodiment in chronological order.

In this example, when a front door opening error described with reference to FIG. 9 or the like occurs in a state where a certain sound is output at the first volume, the volume of the certain sound is set to be higher than the first volume. The volume is changed to a lower second volume, and the error sound is output at a third volume higher than the second volume. Further, even during the medal payout operation, if a certain error occurs, the administrator setting value cannot be changed.

In the states shown in FIGS. 16B and 16B, the front door is operated after the administrator switch MSW is operated during the payout operation to reduce the administrator setting value from F to D by two steps. Indicates a state in which a release error has occurred. In this example, since the volume of the payout sound can be adjusted during the payout operation of the medal, the volume of the payout sound is reduced from 95 dB to 81 dB.

Further, when a certain sound (payout sound in this example) is output at the first volume (81 dB in this example) and a front door opening error occurs, the volume of a certain sound (payout sound). Is changed to a second volume (20 dB in this example) which is smaller than the first volume, and an error sound is output at a third volume (100 dB in this example) which is larger than the second volume.

According to this example, the error sound can be made conspicuous while maintaining the output of a certain sound, the operation corresponding to the certain sound (payout operation in this example) continues, and the error occurs. Can be surely grasped, and convenience can be improved.

The states shown in FIGS. 16 (b) and 16 (4) to (6) indicate a state in which a front door opening error occurs during the payout operation and then an operation is performed by the administrator switch MSW. In this example, when a certain sound (payout sound in this example) is output at the first volume (95 dB in this example) and a front door opening error occurs, a certain sound (payout sound) occurs. The volume of is changed to the second volume (20 dB in this example) which is smaller than the first volume, and the error sound is output at the third volume (100 dB in this example) which is larger than the second volume. ..

Further, in this example, even during the medal payout operation, if a certain error (front door opening error in this example) occurs, the administrator setting value cannot be changed. Before and after the operation by the administrator switch MSW, the volume of the payout sound is maintained at 20 dB, and the volume of the error sound is maintained at 100 dB.

According to this example, the error sound can be made conspicuous while maintaining the output of a certain sound, the operation corresponding to the certain sound (payout operation in this example) continues, and the error occurs. Can be surely grasped, and convenience can be improved.

<Invention 5 of the present application>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an outline of the invention 5 of the present application. As described above, the game console according to the invention 5 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIGS. 1 and 17) has a display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 1 and 17) and a game. A door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 1 and 17) provided on the front surface of the table, and a notification means (for example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, and various lamps 420 shown in FIG. 3). The shutter 163 (reel 110 to 112) shown in FIG. 1 includes a first operating means and a second operating means used for changing certain settings (for example, volume setting, light amount setting) related to the notification means. A game table including a plurality of types of operating means, wherein the first operating means is provided at a position where the door body can be operated only when the door body is in the closed state or the open state. The means (for example, the administrator switch MSW shown in FIG. 17, the back knob (rotary switch), the slide switch, etc. used by the administrator (a game store clerk, etc.)), and the second operating means is the door. Means provided at positions that can be operated even when the body is in the closed state (for example, the player switch PSW shown in FIG. 17, a cross key having up / down / left / right buttons and a decision button used by the player, and an effect button. , A touch panel, etc.), and the display means displays a certain setting value (for example, an administrator setting value, a player setting value) indicating that the setting value of the certain setting is a certain value (for example, a player setting value). It is a means capable of displaying the administrator setting value display MD shown in FIGS. 9A and 17 and the player setting value PD shown in FIGS. 9A and 17, and the door body is in the open state. In a certain state in which a certain screen display including the certain setting value display (hereinafter, referred to as “first screen display”; for example, the display of the volume setting screen shown in FIG. 17 (3)) is displayed. When a certain operation is performed on the first operating means, a certain screen display different from the first screen display (hereinafter referred to as "second screen display" is referred to as, for example, FIG. 17 (4)). It is a game table characterized in that it is configured to switch (or the first screen display disappears) to switch to (display of the volume setting screen shown in).

Conventionally, there is a game console that can be set by both the administrator operation and the player operation with respect to a certain setting related to the game console. For example, when a certain setting is a volume setting, the administrator operation (by the first operation means) There are specifications in which the setting range of the player operation (operation by the second operating means) is determined based on the setting value of the operation), and the specification in which the maximum setting value of the player operation is determined based on the setting value of the administrator operation. In such a specification, the volume may not be as desired by the player only by the player operation, so it is necessary to have the clerk of the game store change the set value of the administrator operation. I was worried because I couldn't confirm whether the setting value of the administrator operation was changed, and sometimes I was dissatisfied when the desired volume was not reached.

In this regard, according to the game console according to the invention 5 of the present application, when a certain operation is performed on the first operating means, the display is switched to the second screen display different from the first screen display. It is possible to easily visually grasp that the operation by the operation means of is accepted. For this reason, it is possible for the manager such as a clerk of the game store to improve the convenience in the operation of changing a certain setting, and for the player to confirm that the operation of changing a certain setting is surely performed. You can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

Further, the set value of the certain setting is changed by the operation of the first type of setting value (for example, the administrator setting value) that can be changed by the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means. A plurality of types of setting values including a possible second type setting value (for example, a player setting value) are included, and the display means is a first type setting value indicating the first type setting value. It is a means capable of displaying a display (for example, the administrator setting value display MD shown in FIGS. 9A and 17), and the display means is a second type of setting indicating the second type of setting value. It is a means capable of displaying a value display (for example, a player set value PD shown in FIGS. 9A and 17), and the certain set value display is one of the first type of set value display. At least when the door body is in the open state, at least the first type of setting value display among the first type of setting value display and the second type of setting value display is displayed. It may be configured to be displayable.

With such a configuration, when the door body is in the open state, at least the first type of setting value display can be displayed. Therefore, when the door body is open, work other than a certain setting change operation can be performed. It becomes possible to do it, and the convenience can be further improved.

Further, at least when the door body is in the open state, a certain screen display including both the display of the first type of setting value and the display of the second type of setting value (hereinafter, "the first". It is referred to as "three screen displays". For example, the display of the volume setting screen shown in FIG. 17 (4)) may be configured to be displayable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to perform a certain setting change operation while checking both the first type of setting value display and the second type of setting value display. Convenience can be further enhanced.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a door open state display (for example, a front door open error display shown in FIGS. 8A and 8) indicating that the door body is in the open state. Regardless of whether the third screen display is displayed or not, the door open state display is displayed when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state. The display means is capable of starting the display of the third screen display when the door body is in a closed state, and the display means is such that the door body can start the display. It is a means that cannot start the display of the third screen display (or at least the second kind of setting value display) in a certain open state, and the door body is in the closed state and the third screen. In a certain state where the display is displayed, when the door body is different from a certain case in the open state, the third screen display being displayed can be continuously displayed. It may be configured in.

With such a configuration, when the door body is opened due to fraudulent activity, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the door open state display is hidden by the third screen display, and fraudulent activity. Etc. may be reliably prevented. In addition, when displaying the volume etc. first, it is necessary to display the system setting screen etc. after a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of one game (for example, after the end of payout), and the act of waiting until the predetermined time elapses itself. Because it stands out, it does not pose a problem for fraud prevention.

Further, when a certain operation is performed on the second operating means in a certain state where the door body is closed and the third screen display is displayed, the third screen display is displayed. In a certain state in which the set value display of the second type included is updatable, the door body is in the open state, and the third screen display is displayed, the first operation means. When a certain operation is performed on the door body, the setting value display of the first type included in the third screen display is configured to be updatable, and the door body is in the open state and the third type. Even if a certain operation is performed on the second operating means in a certain state where the screen display is displayed, the setting value display of the second type included in the third screen display is updated. It may be configured not to be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the state in which the operation by the first operating means is valid and the state in which the operation by the second operating means is valid, so that a mistake in the operation of changing a certain setting can be made. Can be prevented in advance. Further, in a certain state where the door body is open and the third screen display is displayed, even if a certain operation is performed on the second operating means, the third screen display is included. Since the second set value display is not updated, it is possible to make the player recognize that only the operation by the first operating means is effective when the door body is open, and to give the player a sense of conviction. Can be done.

Further, when the door body is in the closed state and the third screen display is displayed and the door body is in the open state, the third screen display includes the door open state display. The screen display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth screen display") is configured to be displayed, and the fourth screen display is at least a part of the second type of setting value display. May overlap with the door open state display, and may include a display in which the set value display of the first type does not overlap with the door open state display.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the visibility of the setting value display of the first type while reducing the visibility of the setting value display of the second type, so that the operation by the first operating means can be performed. Can be recognized as being in a valid state, and a mistake in a certain setting change operation can be prevented.

<Invention 6 of the present application>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an outline of the invention 6 of the present application. As described above, the game console according to the invention 6 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIGS. 1 and 18) has a display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 1 and 18) and a game. A door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 1 and 18) provided on the front surface of the table and capable of detecting the open / closed state of the door body (for example, the open / close sensor 103 shown in FIG. 18). , Magnetic sensors, proximity switches, micro switches, hall elements, etc.) and notification means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, various lamps 420 shown in FIG. 3, shutters 163 shown in FIG. 1, reels 110 to 112) and a plurality of types of operating means including a first operating means and a second operating means used for changing certain settings (for example, volume setting, light amount setting) relating to the notification means. The first operating means of the game table is a means provided at a position where the door body can be operated only when the door body is in the closed state or the open state (for example, the management shown in FIG. 18). Person switch MSW, a back knob (rotary switch), a slide switch, etc. used by an administrator (a game store clerk, etc.), and the second operating means is operated even when the door body is in the closed state. Means provided at possible positions (for example, the player switch PSW shown in FIG. 18, a cross key having up / down / left / right buttons and a decision button used by the player, an effect button, a touch panel, etc.), and the detection thereof. The means means that when the door body is in the closed state, the detection state is a closed detection state (for example, a state in which the detection means is detecting the closed detection state or a signal indicating that the closed state is in the closed detection state. It is a means capable of being in a state in which the detection means is outputting to the outside), and when the door body is in the open state, the detection state is in the open detection state (for example, the detection means). Is a means capable of being in a state of detecting that the door is in the open detection state or a state in which the detection means outputs a signal indicating that the door is in the open detection state to the outside). The door body is subjected to a predetermined operation related to the means (for example, an operation of pushing in a rod-shaped body to block light from the light projecting portion of the open / close sensor of the main body 101 and set the detection state to the closed detection state). Is configured so that the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state even in the open state, and the display means has a certain setting display (for example, FIG. 9A) relating to the certain setting. And the player setting value shown in FIG. PD) is a means capable of displaying a certain error display when the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the door body is in the closed state and the door body is in the closed state. When the door body changes from the closed state to the open state in the state where the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state and the certain setting display is displayed, the detection state of the detection means is changed to the open state. The detection state is reached, and the display of the certain setting display that has been displayed ends, and at the same time, the certain error display (for example, the front door opening error display ER shown in FIG. 18 (2) and FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (2)) The front door opening error display (shown in) is displayed, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the certain error display is displayed. When the predetermined operation is performed in the above-mentioned state, the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state, and the display of the certain error display displayed is terminated (for example, FIG. 18 (3)), when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, the display of the certain setting display can be started (for example, FIG. 18). (4)) In the state where the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state and the certain setting display is displayed, the first operating means is used. On the other hand, when a certain operation (for example, the operation of changing the administrator setting value from 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 18 (4) to (5)) is performed, the display of the certain setting display displayed is displayed. The game console is configured to be terminated but not to display the certain error display (for example, the state shown in FIG. 18 (5)).

Conventionally, there is a game console that can be set by both the administrator operation and the player operation with respect to a certain setting related to the game table. Since it is necessary to consider the volume of each type of game console, the administrator should check the combination of the setting value of the administrator operation and the setting value of the player operation before the opening of business or the installation of the game console. I was going.

For example, in the case of a specification in which the setting range of the player operation (operation by the second operating means) is determined based on the setting value of the administrator operation (operation by the first operating means), the setting value of the administrator operation and the player If both operation setting values are in 10 stages, there are 100 combinations. Conventionally, the player operation setting value is checked from 1 to 10 while the administrator operation setting value is 1, and the door is opened. After making it open, the setting value of the administrator operation was changed to 2, then the door was closed, and the setting value of the player operation was confirmed from 1 to 10 in the same manner as before.

In the conventional confirmation work, it is necessary to open and close the door many times, so the work efficiency is poor, and in the case of confirmation work due to the occurrence of a problem during business, an error sound is output, so to the surrounding players. There was also a risk of inconvenience. That is, in the past, there have been problems in that work efficiency is poor and there is a risk of inconvenience to surrounding players.

Here, for example, the problem can be solved by temporarily closing the door open / close sensor and performing the above-mentioned confirmation work while the door is open. There may be a problem. That is, when the setting value of the administrator operation is 1, the setting value of the player operation is confirmed from 1 to 10, the setting value of the administrator operation is set to 2, and then the setting value is set to 3. There is a problem that 10 kinds of confirmation work are skipped when the set value of the manual operation is 2. If it turns out that the previous work is to change the setting value of the administrator operation, it can be understood that the next operation is to check the setting value of the player operation from 1 to 10, but there is no way to know it. In the past, confirmation work was often skipped.

In this regard, according to the game console according to the invention 6 of the present application, when a predetermined operation is performed, the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state, and the display of the certain error display that has been displayed ends. Therefore, it is not necessary to repeatedly open and close the door body when performing a certain setting change operation regarding the notification means, and the work load can be significantly reduced as compared with the conventional case. Further, when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state and a certain setting display is displayed, when a certain operation is performed on the first operation means, the display is displayed. Since the display of the certain setting display is terminated but the error display is not displayed, the operation by the first operating means is accepted when the display of the certain setting display is terminated. It is possible to surely recognize that, and it is possible to solve the conventional problems such as skipping the confirmation work. Further, since a certain error display is not displayed, the visibility in the confirmation work is not hindered, and a certain error display is displayed when the operation by the first operating means is not performed. , It is also possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition to being displayed on the back of a certain error display, "the display of a certain setting display is completed" includes displaying a certain setting display lightly (transparent display) to reduce visibility. It is a concept. Further, a certain error display may be a display indicating that the door is open and may not be an error.

Further, it is possible to change (increase or decrease) the volume or the amount of light in a certain state (for example, the volume or the amount of light is increased or decreased) in which the door body is in the closed state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state and the certain setting display is displayed. When a certain operation is performed on the second operating means, the setting value of the certain setting of the notification means changes and the display mode of the certain setting display displayed is also changed. The first is in a state in which the door body is configured to change, the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the certain setting display is displayed. When a certain operation is performed on the operating means, the setting value of the certain setting of the notification means is changed, but the display of the certain setting display that has been displayed may be terminated. ..

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably recognize that the operation by the first operation means has been accepted by the end of the display of a certain setting display, and the conventional confirmation work is skipped. The problem can be solved.

Further, a second notification means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) different from the notification means (hereinafter referred to as “first notification means”; for example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3). The display means is configured to be capable of changing a second setting with respect to the second notification means by a change operation, wherein the display means displays a second setting with respect to the second setting (eg,). , Display of the set value of the light amount of the backlight), and the display of the second setting display when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state. The first is in a state where the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and a certain second setting display is displayed. When a certain operation is performed on the operation means of the above, the display of the second certain setting display that has been displayed may be terminated.

With such a configuration, it is possible to turn off a second setting display unrelated to the operation by the first operating means, and to surely execute a certain setting changing operation regarding the first notification means. Can be done.

Further, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and rotationally driven are provided, and from the start of rotation of the plurality of reels to the end of rotation of all the reels. In such a state, at least a predetermined effect in which the first notification means is used is configured to be feasible, and at least a certain reel stop state in which the plurality of reels are not rotating (for example, the non-game shown in FIG. 11). In the middle), the certain setting can be changed by performing a certain operation on the second operating means, and at least the reel rotation state in which the plurality of reels are rotating (for example,). , During the special effect during rotation shown in FIGS. 12 (b) and 12 (1)), even if a certain operation is performed on the second operating means, the certain setting cannot be changed. , At least in any of the certain reel stop state and the certain reel rotation state, the certain setting can be changed by performing a certain operation on the first operating means. May be.

Further, the control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) capable of executing the payout control of the game medium based on the result of the game, the storage means capable of storing the game medium (for example, the storage device), and the settlement. An operation means (for example, a settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and when the settlement operation means is operated, the game medium stored in the storage means is configured to be able to be settled. The notification means is a sound output means (for example, the speaker 272, 277 shown in FIG. 3), and the first notification means is a means capable of outputting a payout sound in connection with the payout control. One notification means is a means capable of outputting a settlement sound in connection with the settlement of the game medium, the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, and the payout sound is provided. Is being output (for example, during the payout operation shown in FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (1)), when a certain operation is performed on the first operating means, the volume of the payout sound being output is increased. Is configurable, the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the settlement sound is output (for example, FIGS. 16A (3). ), Even if a certain operation is performed on the first operating means, the volume of the settlement sound being output may not change. The amount of change in the volume of the payout sound (including 0) may be larger or smaller than the amount of change in the volume of the settlement sound (including 0).

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably output the settlement sound, and it is possible to prevent settlement due to fraudulent acts.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying the management setting display for the administrator (for example, the menu screen SD1 of the system setting screen shown in FIGS. 14A and 14A), and the door body is opened. The state and the detection state of the detection means may be configured so that the display of the management setting display cannot be started in the closed detection state.

Further, the display means is set to a specific operation (for example, an operation means provided at a position where the front door 102 can be operated even when the front door 102 is closed, and a position where the display means can be operated only when the front door 102 is in the open state. When the provided operation means is pressed at the same time), the management setting display for the administrator (for example, the menu screen SD1 of the system setting screen shown in FIGS. 15B and 15) can be displayed. It is a means, and is displayed when the specific operation is performed while the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state and the certain setting display is displayed. It may be configured so that the management setting display is displayed at the same time as the display of the certain setting display that has been performed is completed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to end the display of a certain setting display and immediately perform the setting for the administrator, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency as compared with the conventional case.

Further, the management setting display is a setting display related to volume (for example, the volume setting screen SD2 shown in FIGS. 14 (b) (5) to (6)), and the state in which the administrator setting display is displayed. In the above, when the certain operation is performed on the first operation means, the setting value of the certain setting regarding the volume may be changed, but the setting display for the administrator may not be erased. ..

With such a configuration, the administrator setting value can be changed while the administrator setting display is displayed, and the work efficiency can be improved as compared with the conventional case.

<Other embodiments>
Next, another embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23.

In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 19 to 23 are used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals are shown in the description of the present embodiment. Priority is given to the reference numerals 19 to 23. Moreover, each embodiment of this embodiment and each embodiment of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other.

First, the basic configuration of the game console according to the present embodiment will be described.

The game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is provided with a display means, a door body that can be opened and closed on the front surface of the game table, and a detection capable of detecting the open / closed state of the door body. It is provided with means and operating means.

<Basic configuration / door body, detection means>
The door body is a member provided on the front surface of the game table and can be opened and closed. For example, the front door 102 that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 described with reference to FIG. 1 corresponds to the door body. Further, the detection means is a means capable of detecting the open / closed state of the door body, and corresponds to, for example, an optical sensor (open / close sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit.

Further, the detection means can change the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is closed, and can change the detection state to the open detection state when the door body is open state. Is. Further, by performing a predetermined operation regarding the detection means, the detection state of the detection means is configured to be the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front door 102 is a door body that is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. be. That is, the front door 102 is a door body that is provided on the front surface of the slot machine (game table) 100 and can be opened and closed.

In this example, by inserting a key held by an administrator (for example, a clerk of a game store) into the door key hole 140, the front door 102 locked in the closed state can be opened. Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change from the closed state to the open state), but a person other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. ..

The side plate 260 on the right side of the main body 101 is provided with an optical sensor (open / close sensor; not shown) including a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and a front surface is provided between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the open / close sensor. It is configured to allow a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the door 102 to pass through.

The main control unit 300 monitors the state of various sensors 318 including the open / close sensor for each interrupt time. When the front door 102 is in the closed state and the light-shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting portion of the open / close sensor of the main body 101 is blocked, the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state. For example, a low level signal) is output to the main control unit 300.

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the light-shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting portion of the open / close sensor of the main body 101 is not blocked, the open / close sensor indicates the open detection state. A signal (for example, a high-level signal) is output to the main control unit 300.

That is, the open / close sensor is a detection means capable of detecting the open / closed state of the front door (door body) 102, and when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the detection state is in the closed detection state and the front door 102 is in the open state. In the case of, the detection state becomes the open detection state.

The "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to the optical sensor, and may be a magnetic sensor, a proximity switch, a micro switch, a Hall element, or the like. Further, it is not limited to the one in which the open detection state and the closed detection state are always switched according to the opening and closing of the door body, and even if the door body is in the open state, the detection state can be changed to the closed detection state. On the contrary, even if the door body is in the closed state, the detection state may be the one that can be changed to the open detection state.

Here, the open / close sensor according to this example is configured so that the detection state becomes the closed detection state even when the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state by performing a predetermined operation. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light-shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light-emitting part and the light-receiving part of the open / close sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like, and the main body is fixed. By blocking the light from the light projecting portion of the open / close sensor of 101, the detection state of the open / close sensor can be forcibly set to the closed detection state even when the front door 102 is in the open state.

The "predetermined operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and for example, a DIP switch for setting the open / close sensor to the closed detection state may be provided, and the DIP switch may be operated as a predetermined operation. .. Further, when the detection means is configured by a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the open / close sensor may be changed to the closed detection state by bringing the magnets close to each other.

<Basic configuration / operation means>
The operating means are means that can be operated, and the means (first operating means) provided at a position where the front door (door body) 102 can be operated only when the front door (door body) 102 is open, and the front door (door body). It is a means including both means (second operating means) provided at a position where the 102 can be operated even in the closed state.

The first operating means includes, for example, a back knob (rotary switch), a slide switch, a touch panel, various buttons, setting keys, etc. used by an administrator (a game store clerk, etc.), and the first operating means is used. The operation includes a rotation operation, a pressing operation, a long pressing operation, a sliding operation, a touch operation, and the like.

Further, when the first operating means is composed of a plurality of operating means including at least a third operating means and a fourth operating means, a rotation operation, a pressing operation, and a long pressing operation of the third operating means are performed. , Slide operation, touch operation, etc., and one or more operations such as rotation operation, pressing operation, long press operation, slide operation, touch operation, etc. of the fourth operating means are combined. The operation (for example, the rotation operation of the third operating means + the pressing operation of the fourth operating means, etc.) is also included in the operation for the first operating means.

The second operating means includes, for example, a cross key having up / down / left / right buttons and a decision button, an effect button, a touch panel, various buttons, etc. used by the player, and the operation for the second operating means is rotation. It includes operations, push operations, long press operations, slide operations, touch operations, and the like.

Further, when the second operating means is composed of a plurality of operating means including at least a fifth operating means and a sixth operating means, a rotation operation, a pressing operation, and a long pressing operation of the fifth operating means are performed. , Slide operation, touch operation, etc., and one or more operations such as rotation operation, pressing operation, long press operation, slide operation, touch operation, etc. of the fifth operating means are combined. The operation (for example, the rotation operation of the fifth operating means + the pressing operation of the sixth operating means, etc.) is also included in the operation for the second operating means.

Further, an operation combining the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means (for example, the rotation operation of the first operating means + the pressing operation of the second operating means, the pressing operation of the first operating means). + Pressing operation (simultaneous pressing) of the second operating means is also included in the operation for the operating means.

Further, the operating means according to this example is a means used for changing both the volume setting and the light amount setting, but the operating means according to the present invention is not limited to this, and either the volume setting or the light amount setting is used. It may be a means used for one of the changing operations, or it may be a means used for a setting other than the volume setting and the light amount setting (for example, a setting related to the display means).

<Basic configuration / display means>
The display means is a means capable of displaying one or a plurality of types. For example, in addition to the liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 described with reference to FIG. 1, a multi-segment display (7-segment display) and a dot matrix. A display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen is applicable.

<Example of starting display for administrator>
The game console (slot machine) according to this example can display a management display for the administrator, and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state, a certain operation is performed on the operation means. When is performed, the management display can be started to be displayed.

FIG. 19A shows in chronological order an example in which the display for the administrator is started when the specific operation means is turned on when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state. It is a figure.

Here, the "operating state" in FIGS. 19 to 23 indicates the operating state of the game console (slot machine). Further, the "door body closed state / door body open state" indicates whether the door body (front door 102 in this example) is in the closed state or the open state, and is in the "closed state / open state". "Detection state" indicates whether the detection means (in this example, the open / close sensor) is in the closed detection state or the open detection state.

In addition, the "non-insertion state / insertion state" is a state in which a number of game media (medals) in which a game can be started (for example, one) is inserted (inserted state), or a game in which a game can be started. It indicates which state the medium (medal) is not inserted (non-inserted state).

Further, the "specific operating means" is a slide switch provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state as one of the operating means among the plurality of types of operating means (in this example, the front door (door body) 102 is open. SW) indicates whether it is in the on state or the off state.

Further, "other operation" indicates an operation for one of a plurality of types of operation means and is not an operation for a specific operation means, and "error sound" is a sound output means (this). In the example, the content of the sound output from the speaker) is shown, and the “display example” shows an example of the display in the display means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157).

The states shown in FIGS. 19 (A) and 19 (2) are states in which the door body closed state and closed detection state shown in FIGS. 19 (A) and (1) are changed to the door body open state and open detection state.

In this example, since the operation (door closing → opening) of opening the door body (front door 102) is performed in the door body closed state and the closing detection state shown in FIGS. 19A and 19 (1), sound output is performed. An error sound (in this example, a sound notifying the door opening such as "the door is open") is output from the means (speaker), and the stop displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). The middle effect is turned off, and the error display ED1 (in this example, the display notifying the door opening that "the door is open") is displayed at the bottom of the display area. It should be noted that the error display ED1 (door open) may be overlapped and displayed before the stopped effect without erasing the stopped effect.

Subsequent states shown in FIGS. 19 (A) and 19 (3) include an operation of switching the specific operating means (slide switch SW) from off to on in the open state and open detection state of the door body shown in FIGS. 19 (A) and 19 (2). It is in the state of being done.

In this example, in the door body open state and open detection state shown in FIGS. 19 (A) and 19 (2), the operation (operation to switch from off to on) for the specific operation means (slide switch SW) is performed, so that the sound is produced. The error sound (door open) output from the output means (speaker) is stopped (silenced), and the error display ED1 (door open) displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is turned off. The management display SD for the administrator (in this example, a display in which various settings (system settings) related to the game console can be made) is displayed.

The management display SD may be overlapped and displayed before the error display ED1 (door open) or the like without erasing the error display ED1 (door open) or the like. Further, the operation of switching the specific operation means from off to on is not limited to this example, and for example, a setting key provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state is set from the initial position. It may be an operation of rotating to a position where it can be changed.

Here, the display SD for the administrator is a screen display used by an administrator such as a clerk of a game store to make various settings and operation checks of the game console. In this example, the power saving setting is set. , Time setting, volume setting, brightness setting, etc. can be set, and the history of errors that have occurred in the past can be viewed.

Subsequent states shown in FIGS. 19 (A) and 19 (4) include an operation of switching the specific operating means (slide switch SW) from on to off in the open state and open detection state of the door body shown in FIGS. 19 (A) and 19 (3). It is in the state of being done.

In this example, in the closed state and the closed detection state of the door body shown in FIGS. 19A and 19 (3), the operation (the operation of switching from on to off) for the specific operation means (slide switch SW) is performed. The error sound (door open) is output again from the sound output means (speaker), and the management display SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased to display the error display ED1 (door open). ) Is displayed again.

The error display ED1 (door open) may be overlapped and displayed in front of the management display SD without erasing the management display SD. Further, the operation of switching the specific operation means from on to off is not limited to this example, and for example, the setting value can be changed by the setting key provided at the position where the operation can be performed only when the door body is in the open state. It may be an operation of rotating from a normal position to an initial position (returning to the initial position).

The following states shown in FIGS. 19 (A) and 19 (5) are states in which the door body open state and open detection state shown in FIGS. 19 (A) and (4) are changed to the door body closed state and closed detection state.

In this example, since the operation of closing the door body (front door 102) is performed (door open → close) in the door body open state and open detection state shown in FIGS. 19 (A) and 19 (4), sound output is performed. Stop (silence) the error sound (door open) output from the means (speaker), and turn off the error display ED1 (door open) displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). The stopped effect is displayed again.

<Example of not starting the display for the administrator>
The game console (slot machine) according to this example can display the management display for the administrator, and cannot start displaying the management display when the door body is open and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state. It is configured to (or may not be possible).

FIG. 19B shows in chronological order an example in which the display for the administrator is not started because the specific operation means is turned on when the door body is open and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state. It is a figure. Since the states shown in FIGS. 19 (B) (1) and 19 (2) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 19 (A) (1) and 19 (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

The state shown in FIGS. 19 (B) and 19 (3) is an operation (predetermined operation) of changing the open / close sensor from the open detection state to the closed detection state in the door body open state and open detection state shown in FIGS. ) Has been performed.

As described above, here, the open / close sensor according to this example is configured so that the detection state becomes the closed detection state even if the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state by performing a predetermined operation. Has been done. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light-shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light-emitting part and the light-receiving part of the open / close sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like, and the main body is fixed. By blocking the light from the light projecting portion of the open / close sensor of 101, the detection state of the open / close sensor can be forcibly set to the closed detection state even when the front door 102 is in the open state.

In this example, in the door body open state and open detection state shown in FIGS. 19 (B) and 19 (2), an operation (predetermined operation) for changing the open / close sensor from the open detection state to the closed detection state is performed, so that sound is heard. The error sound (door open) output from the output means (speaker) is stopped (silenced), and the error display ED1 (door open) displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is turned off. Then, the stopped effect is displayed again.

Subsequent states shown in FIGS. 19 (B) and 19 (4) include an operation of switching the specific operating means (slide switch SW) from off to on in the door body open state and closed detection state shown in FIGS. 19 (B) and (3). It is in the state of being done.

In this example, in the door body open state and closed detection state shown in FIGS. 19 (B) and 19 (3), the operation (operation to switch from off to on) for the specific operation means (slide switch SW) was performed, but this example. Since the game console (slot machine) according to the above is configured so that the display of the management display cannot be started when the door body is open and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, the display means (liquid crystal display device). The display of the stopped effect displayed in the display area of 157) is continued.

Subsequent states shown in FIGS. 19 (B) and 19 (5) include an operation of switching the specific operating means (slide switch SW) from off to on in the door body open state and closed detection state shown in FIGS. 19 (B) and (4). It is performed, and a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed.

In this example, since the operation (operation to switch from off to on) for the specific operation means (slide switch SW) is performed in the door body open state and the closed detection state, the sound output means (speaker) gives a second error. A sound (in this example, a voice notifying that an abnormal operation such as "operation abnormality" has been performed) is output, and a stopped effect displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). Is turned off to display the error display ED2 (in this example, a display indicating that an abnormal operation has been performed, that is, "operation is abnormal"). It should be noted that the error display ED2 (operation abnormality) may be overlapped and displayed before the stopped effect without erasing the stopped effect.

In the subsequent states shown in FIGS. 19 (B) and 19 (6), an operation of changing the open / close sensor from the closed detection state to the open detection state is performed in the door body open state and the closed detection state shown in FIGS. It is in a state of being.

In this example, since the operation of changing the open / close sensor from the closed detection state to the open detection state is performed in the door body open state and the closed detection state shown in FIGS. 19 (B) and 19 (5), the sound output means (speaker). The error sound (door open) is output again from, and the second error sound (operation abnormality) is continuously output. Further, the error display ED2 (operation abnormality) displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is continuously displayed.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is provided with a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and the front surface of the game console. A door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detecting means that can detect the opened / closed state of the door body (for example, an opening / closing sensor), and an operating means (for example, FIG. 19A) are shown. A game table provided with a slide switch SW), wherein the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means. Is a means capable of changing the detection state to the open detection state when the door body is in the open state, and shields light from a predetermined operation (for example, a light projecting unit of an open / close sensor) related to the detection means. The door body is configured to be in the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state, and the display means is managed by the administrator. It is a means capable of displaying the display (for example, the display SD for the administrator shown in FIGS. 19A and 19A), and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state. When a certain operation is performed on the operating means, the management display can be started to be displayed, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state. Even if a certain operation (for example, an operation of switching from off to on) is performed on the operating means, the display of the management display cannot be started, and the door body is configured to be in the open state and the detection. When the operation is performed on the operation means while the detection state of the means is the closure detection state, a certain error notification (for example, the error display ED2 (operation abnormality) shown in FIGS. 19B and 19 (5)) is reported. ) Is a game table characterized by being configured to be feasible.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined operation is performed, the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state, and in this state, even if a certain operation is performed on the operation means. Since the display of the management display cannot be started, it is not necessary to repeat the opening / closing operation of the door body in the operation check of the display means, the visibility of the display means is not obstructed, and a certain error notification can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent setting mistakes and fraudulent activities.

Further, the predetermined operation is performed while the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state and the certain error notification is being executed, and the detection means is performed. Even if the detection state of is changed to the open detection state, the certain error notification may be continuously executed.

With such a configuration, error notification can be continued, and setting mistakes, fraudulent acts, and the like can be prevented.

Further, the operating means may be a means provided at a position where the door body can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the convenience of an administrator such as a clerk of a game store, and it is possible to prevent setting mistakes, fraudulent acts, and the like.

Further, the certain error notification is an error notification related to the certain operation (for example, a voice notifying that an abnormal operation has been performed such as "operation abnormality" or an abnormality such as "operation abnormality". It may be a display notifying that an operation has been performed).

With such a configuration, the cause of the error can be quickly grasped, and a setting error, fraudulent activity, or the like can be quickly dealt with.

<Example 1 to continuously display the display for the administrator>
In the game console (slot machine) according to this example, a predetermined operation is performed while the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state, and the management display is displayed, and the detection is performed. Even if the detection state of the means becomes the closed detection state, the management display is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 20C, a predetermined operation is performed in a state where the door body is open and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state and the management display is displayed, and the detection state of the detection means is changed. It is a figure which showed the example in time series that the management display is continuously displayed even in the closed detection state.

The state shown in FIGS. 20 (C) and 20 (1) is the same as the state described with reference to FIGS. 19 (A) and 19 (3), and the specific operating means (slide switch SW) is in the door body open state and the open detection state. Is in the state where the operation of switching from off to on has been performed.

In this example, since the operation (operation to switch from off to on) was performed for the specific operation means (slide switch SW) in the door body open state and the open detection state, the sound was output from the sound output means (speaker). The error sound (door open) is stopped (silenced), and the error display ED1 (door open) displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is turned off to turn off the management display SD for the administrator. (In this example, the display that allows various settings (system settings) related to the game console) is displayed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 20 (C) and 20 (2) open and close when the door body is open and the open detection state is shown and the specific operating means (slide switch SW) is on. This is a state in which an operation (predetermined operation) for changing the sensor from the open detection state to the closed detection state has been performed.

In this example, the open / close sensor is changed from the open detection state to the closed detection state in the door body open state and the open detection state shown in FIG. However, in the game console (slot machine) according to this example, the management display is displayed when the door body is open and the detection state of the detection means is open detection state. In this case, even if a predetermined operation is performed and the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state, the management display is configured to be continuously displayed. Therefore, the management display SD is displayed. It is continuously displayed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 20 (C) and 20 (3) are states in which the door body is open and the door is in the closed detection state, and the specific operation means (slide switch SW) is on, and another operation is performed.

In this example, since the specific operation means (slide switch SW) is in the ON state, it is possible to change or confirm the set value (operation related to the set value). In this example, the door body is in the open state. It is possible to change or confirm the set value by operating the cross key provided at the position where it can be operated only in the case.

In the subsequent states shown in FIGS. 20 (C) and 20 (4), an operation of changing the open / close sensor from the closed detection state to the open detection state is performed in the door body open state and the closed detection state shown in FIGS. It is in a state of being.

In this example, since the operation of changing the open / close sensor from the closed detection state to the open detection state is performed in the door body open state and the closed detection state shown in FIGS. 20 (C) and 20 (3), the sound output means (speaker). After outputting an error sound (door open) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second, which is a short period), the display SD for management was displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) while being stopped (silenced). Is continuously displayed. It should be noted that each time the operation of changing the open / close sensor from the closed detection state to the open detection state is performed, an error sound (door opening) may be output for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second which is a short period).

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is provided with a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and the front surface of the game console. A door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detecting means that can detect the opened / closed state of the door body (for example, an opening / closing sensor), and an operating means (for example, FIG. 19A) are shown. A game table provided with a slide switch SW), wherein the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means. Is a means capable of changing the detection state to the open detection state when the door body is in the open state, and shields light from a predetermined operation (for example, a light projecting unit of an open / close sensor) related to the detection means. The door body is configured to be in the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state, and the display means is managed by the administrator. It is a means capable of displaying the display (for example, the display SD for the administrator shown in FIGS. 19A and 19A), and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state. When a certain operation is performed on the operating means, the management display can be started to be displayed, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state. Even if a certain operation is performed on the operating means, the display of the management display cannot be started, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state. Even if the predetermined operation is performed and the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state in the state where the management display is displayed, the management display can be continuously displayed. It is a game table characterized by being configured in.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, even if the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state, the management display may continue to be displayed. Convenience can be enhanced.

Further, in a state where the management display is continuously displayed, the setting related to the management display may be enabled.

With such a configuration, the convenience of a manager such as a clerk of a game store can be enhanced.

Further, even if the predetermined operation is canceled while the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state and the management display is displayed, the management is performed. The display may be configured so that it can be continuously displayed.

Further, the operating means may be a means provided at a position where the door body can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the convenience of an administrator such as a clerk of a game store and prevent setting mistakes and the like.

<Example 2 to continuously display the display for the administrator>
In the game console (slot machine) according to this example, even if a predetermined operation is canceled while the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state and the management display is displayed. The management display is configured to be continuously displayed (or may be).

In FIG. 20D, when the door body is open and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state and the management display is displayed, the management display is displayed even if the predetermined operation is canceled. It is a figure which showed the example which is continuously displayed in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 20 (D) (1) and (2) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. (C) (1) and (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the states shown in FIGS. 20 (D) and 20 (3), the door body shown in FIGS. 20 (D) and (2) is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, and the management display SD is displayed. In the state, the operation of releasing the specific operation means (slide switch SW) (operation of switching from on to off) is performed.

In this example, while the management display SD is displayed, the operation to release the specific operation means (slide switch SW) (operation to switch from on to off) was performed, but the game console (slot) according to this example. The machine) displays the management display continuously even if the predetermined operation is canceled when the door body is open and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state and the management display is displayed. Since it is configured to be displayed, the management display SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is continuously displayed.

The present invention is not limited to this example, and when the predetermined operation is canceled when the management display is displayed in the open state of the door body and the closed detection state of the detection means. , The management display SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) may be erased.

In the subsequent states shown in FIGS. 20 (D) and 20 (4), an operation of changing the open / close sensor from the closed detection state to the open detection state is performed in the door body open state and the closed detection state shown in FIGS. It is in a state of being.

In this example, since the operation of changing the open / close sensor from the closed detection state to the open detection state is performed in the door body open state and the closed detection state shown in FIGS. 20 (D) and 20 (3), the sound output means (speaker). After outputting an error sound (door open) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second, which is a short period), the display SD for management was displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) while being stopped (silenced). Is continuously displayed. It should be noted that each time the operation of changing the open / close sensor from the closed detection state to the open detection state is performed, an error sound (door opening) may be output for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second which is a short period).

From the state shown in FIGS. 20 (D) and 20 (4), the error display ED1 is displayed when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state as shown in FIGS. 19 (A) and 19 (4). In order to shift to the current state, it is necessary to switch the specific operating means (slide switch SW) from on to off.

In this example, when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state and the management display is displayed, the predetermined operation is canceled (for example, the specific operation means). Even if (slide switch SW) is switched from on to off), the management display may continue to be displayed, which is convenient for managers such as game store clerk. Can be enhanced.

<Example of not starting to display the administrator display according to the operating status of the game console>
In the game console (slot machine) according to this example, a certain operation is performed on the operating means in a state where the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state and the game can be started. Is also configured so that the display of the management display cannot be started.

FIG. 21E shows a management display even if a certain operation is performed on the operating means in a state where the door body is open and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state and the game can be started. It is the figure which showed the example which cannot start the display of. Note that the states shown in FIGS. 21 (E) and 21 (1) and 21 (2) are states in which a number of game media (medals) capable of starting a game are inserted (inserted state). (A) Since it is the same as the state shown in (1) and (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

The states shown in FIGS. 21 (E) and 21 (3) are the specific operating means (slide switch SW) in the state in which the door body is open and the open detection state is shown in FIGS. 21 (E) and 21 (2) and the game can be started. Is in the state where the operation of switching from off to on has been performed.

In this example, it is specified in the state (inserted state) in which the number of game media (medals) at which the game can be started is inserted in the door body open state and the open detection state shown in FIGS. 21 (E) and 21 (2). An operation (operation to switch from off to on) was performed on the operation means (slide switch SW), but in the game console (slot machine) according to this example, the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state. However, in a state where the game can be started, even if a certain operation is performed on the operating means, the display of the management display cannot be started. Therefore, the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). The display of the stopped effect that was displayed in the display area of is continued, and the display for the administrator has not started.

The following states shown in FIGS. 21 (E) and 21 (4) are the specific operating means (slide switch SW) in the state where the door body is open and the open detection state is shown and the game can be started. ) Is switched from off to on, and a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed.

In this example, since the operation (operation to switch from off to on) for the specific operation means (slide switch SW) is performed in the state where the door body is open and the opening is detected and the game can be started, an error is displayed. The error display ED1 (door open) is continuously displayed without performing ED2 (operation abnormality).

In addition, in the door body open state and the open detection state shown in FIGS. 21 (E) and 21 (3), when the operation of switching the specific operation means (slide switch SW) from off to on is performed, FIG. 19 (B) ( It may be configured to shift to a state in which both the output of the error sound (door opening) and the display of the error display ED2 (operation abnormality) shown in 6) are performed.

As described above, the game table according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is provided with a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and the front surface of the game table. A door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detecting means that can detect the opened / closed state of the door body (for example, an opening / closing sensor), and an operating means (for example, FIG. 19A) are shown. A game table provided with a slide switch SW), wherein the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means. Is a means capable of changing the detection state to the open detection state when the door body is in the open state, and shields light from a predetermined operation (for example, the light projecting unit of the open / close sensor) regarding the detection means. The door body is configured to be in the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state, and the display means is managed by the administrator. It is a means capable of displaying a display (for example, an administrator display SD shown in FIGS. 19A and 19A), and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state. When a certain operation (for example, an operation of switching the setting key from off to on) is performed on the operation means, the management display can be started to be displayed, and the door body is in the open state and the door body. When the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, the door body is configured so that the display of the management display cannot be started even if the certain operation is performed on the operation means, and the door body is opened. Even if the state and the detection state of the detection means are the open detection state, even if the operation is performed on the operation means in the state where the game value (for example, the game medium ) is input. , The display of the management display cannot be started , the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the management display is displayed. In the state, even if the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state and the certain operation is not performed on the operation means (for example, the setting key is off), the management It is a game table characterized in that the display can be continuously displayed .

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state and the game can be started, the display of the management display cannot be started. In the operation check and the like, the visibility of the display means is not hindered, and setting mistakes and the like can be prevented.

Further, when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state and the game medium is not inserted, the certain operation is performed on the operation means. And, the display for management may be configured to be able to start displaying.

With such a configuration, since the display of the management display can be started, the convenience of a manager such as a clerk of a game store can be enhanced.

Further, the state in which the game medium is inserted may be a state in which the number of inserted game media is less than the number in which the game can be started (for example, a replay state is also included).

With such a configuration, when the number of game media in which the game can be started is inserted (for example, one or more medals are inserted, including the replay state), the display for management is displayed. Since it cannot be started, it does not interfere with the visibility of the display means in checking the operation of the display means, and it is possible to prevent setting mistakes and the like.

Further, the operating means may be a means provided at a position where the door body can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the convenience of an administrator such as a clerk of a game store and prevent setting mistakes and the like.

<Example of starting to display the administrator display according to the operating status of the game console>
In the game console (slot machine) according to this example, when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state and the game can be started, a certain operation is performed on the operation means. , The management display is configured to start displaying.

FIG. 21F shows a management display when a certain operation is performed on the operating means in a state where the door body is open and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state and the game can be started. It is the figure which showed the example which can start the display in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 21 (F) (1) and 21 (3) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. (E) and (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

The state shown in FIGS. 21 (F) and 21 (2) is a specific operating means (slide switch SW) in a state in which the door body is open and the opening is detected and the game can be started. Is in the state where the operation of switching from off to on has been performed.

In this example, it is specified in the state (inserted state) in which the number of game media (medals) at which the game can be started is inserted in the door body open state and the open detection state shown in FIGS. 21 (F) and 21 (1). An operation (operation to switch from off to on) was performed on the operating means (slide switch SW), but in the game console (slot machine) according to this example, the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state. However, when a certain operation is performed on the operation means in the state where the game can be started, the management display is configured to be able to start the display, so that the sound output means (speaker) outputs the game. The second management for the administrator is to stop (mute) the error sound (door open) and turn off the error display ED1 (door open) displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). Display SDa (in this example, a display that allows various settings (system volume setting) related to the volume of the game console) is displayed.

On the other hand, in this example, in a state where the door body is open and the opening is detected and a number of game media (medals) capable of starting the game are inserted (inserted state), the specific operating means (slide switch SW) is used. When an operation (operation of switching from off to on) is performed and there are a plurality of types of management displays, the display of at least one administrator display is not started. Therefore, FIGS. 21 (F) (3). ) And (4), the management display SD (system setting display) for the administrator is configured not to start displaying.

In this example, an example of displaying a second management display (system volume setting display) for the administrator is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the management display SD (system setting display) is shown. ) And the second management display (system volume setting display) (or in addition), the third management display for the administrator (various settings related to the brightness (light amount) of the lamp and LED of the game console) (system) The display system brightness setting display) capable of (brightness setting) may be displayed, or the player setting screen for the player (screen for adjusting the volume and brightness) may be configured so as not to be displayed.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is provided with a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and the front surface of the game console. A door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detecting means that can detect the opened / closed state of the door body (for example, an opening / closing sensor), and an operating means (for example, FIG. 19A) are shown. A game table provided with a slide switch SW), wherein the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means. Is a means capable of changing the detection state to the open detection state when the door body is in the open state, and shields light from a predetermined operation (for example, a light projecting unit of an open / close sensor) related to the detection means. The door body is configured to be in the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state, and the display means is managed by the administrator. It is a means capable of displaying the display (for example, the display SD for the administrator shown in FIGS. 19A and 19A), and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state. When a certain operation is performed on the operating means, the management display can be started to be displayed, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state. Even if a certain operation is performed on the operating means, the display of the management display cannot be started, and a game medium is inserted (for example, one or more medals are inserted). Even in the state), when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, a certain operation (for example, an operation of switching from off to on) is performed on the operation means. The game console is characterized in that the management display can be started to be displayed.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state and the game can be started, the management display can be started to be displayed. It is possible to improve the convenience of managers such as store clerks.

Further, even if the operation means is operated in a state where the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state and the game cannot be started, the operation is performed. It may be configured so that the display of the management display cannot be started.

With such a configuration, since the display of the management display cannot be started, the visibility of the display means is not hindered in the operation check of the display means, and setting mistakes can be prevented. can.

Further, the state in which the game medium is inserted may be a state in which the number of inserted game media is less than the number in which the game can be started (for example, a replay state).

With such a configuration, when the number of game media in which the game can be started is inserted (for example, one or more medals are inserted, including the replay state), the display for management is displayed. Since the display can be started, the convenience of the manager such as a clerk of the game store can be improved.

Further, it may be configured so that the display of the player setting display (for example, the display of the volume setting screen for the player) cannot be started when the game medium is inserted.

Further, the operating means may be a means provided at a position where the door body can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the convenience of an administrator such as a clerk of a game store and prevent setting mistakes and the like.

<Example of starting the display for the administrator during the door open display>
In the game console (slot machine) according to this example, when the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the display related to the door opening is displayed, a certain operation is performed on the operation means. When is performed, the management display is configured so that the display can be started.

FIG. 22 (G) shows that when a certain operation is performed on the operating means in a state where the door body is open and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state and the display regarding the door opening is displayed. It is the figure which showed the example which the display for management starts to display in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 21 (G) (1) and 21 (2) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 19 (A) (1) and 19 (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

The state shown in FIGS. 22 (G) and 22 (3) is an operation (predetermined operation) of changing the open / close sensor from the open detection state to the closed detection state in the door body open state and open detection state shown in FIGS. 22 (G) and (2). ) Has been performed.

In this example, in the door body open state and open detection state shown in FIGS. 22 (G) and 22 (2), an error sound (door open) is output from the sound output means (speaker) and the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). When the error display ED1 (door open) is displayed in the display area of, the operation (predetermined operation) of changing the open / close sensor from the open detection state to the closed detection state was performed. The slot machine) is for management when a certain operation is performed on the operation means in the state where the door body is open and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state and the display regarding the door opening is displayed. Since the display is configured so that the display can be started, the error sound (door opening) output from the sound output means (speaker) is continued, and the administrator in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). The management display SD (system setting display) is displayed, and the error display ED1 (door open) is overlapped in front of this display.

When the door body is open and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state and the display related to the door opening is displayed, a certain operation is performed on the operation means, and there are a plurality of types of management displays. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 22 (G) and 22 (3), the one administrator display (in this example, the second management display (system volume setting display) SDa) is the display related to the door opening (the door opening display). In this example, the display is started while continuing the error display ED1 (door open), but as shown in FIGS. 22 (G) and 22 (4), the display for other administrators (in this example, the display for management (in this example, the display for management ()). The display (system setting display) SD) may be started without continuing (erasing) the display related to the door opening (in this example, the error display ED1 (door opening)).

In addition, when an error other than the door opening error (for example, a selector error) has occurred, one administrator display (in this example, the second management display (system volume setting display) SDa) is displayed. , The display related to the door opening (in this example, error display ED1 (door opening)) and other error notification (selector error) are started while being displayed, but the display for other administrators (in this example, management). The display (system setting display) SD) is started to be displayed without continuing (erasing) the display related to the door opening (in this example, the error display ED1 (door opening)) and other error notification (selector error). It may be one.

As described above, the game table according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is provided with a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and the front surface of the game table. A door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detecting means that can detect the opened / closed state of the door body (for example, an opening / closing sensor), and an operating means (for example, FIG. 19A) are shown. A game table provided with a slide switch SW), wherein the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means. Is a means capable of changing the detection state to the open detection state when the door body is in the open state, and shields light from a predetermined operation (for example, a light projecting unit of an open / close sensor) related to the detection means. The door body is configured to be in the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state, and the display means is managed by the administrator. It is a means capable of displaying a display (for example, an administrator display SD shown in FIGS. 19A and 19A), and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state. When a certain operation is performed on the operating means, the management display can be started to be displayed, and the door body is in the open state and the detection means is in the closed detection state. The display means is configured so that the display of the management display cannot be started even if a certain operation is performed on the operation means, and the display means is a display relating to door opening (for example, FIGS. 22 (G) (2)). It is a means capable of displaying the error display ED1 (door open) shown in the above, and is configured to be able to start displaying the display related to the door opening when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state. In a state where the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and a display relating to the door opening is displayed, a certain operation is performed on the operation means. Is performed, the game console is characterized in that the management display is configured so that the display can be started (while continuing the display regarding the opening of the door).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, even if the display related to the door opening is displayed, the management display may be displayed. Therefore, various settings are made using the administrator display while displaying the information related to the door opening. It is possible to improve the convenience of managers such as clerk of a game store.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of the management display, and the display of one of the plurality of types of management display is a first management display (for example, FIG. 22 (G). ) The system volume setting display SDa) shown in (4), and the display of one of the plurality of types of management displays is the second management display (for example, the system shown in FIGS. 22 (G) (5)). Setting display SD), in a state where the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the display related to the door opening is displayed, the operation means is When the certain operation is performed, the first management display is configured to be able to start displaying (while continuing the display regarding the opening of the door), and the door body detects the open state and the detection means. When the operation is performed on the operating means in a state where the state is the open detection state and the display related to the door opening is displayed, the display for the second management display can be started. However, it may be configured so that the display regarding the opening of the door disappears.

With such a configuration, the visibility of the second management display can be enhanced, and setting mistakes and the like can be prevented.

Further, the operating means may be a means provided at a position where the door body can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the convenience of an administrator such as a clerk of a game store and prevent setting mistakes and the like.

<Example of turning the power on and off while the administrator display is displayed>
The power of the game console (slot machine) according to this example is turned off and the power is turned on when the door body is open and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state and the management display is displayed. When the power is turned on, at least a portion of the administrative display that was displayed before the power was turned off is displayed, even if some operation is released during the off period. Or it may be).

FIG. 22 (H) shows a state in which the power is turned off and the power is turned off while the door body is open and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state and the management display is displayed. An example is shown in chronological order in which at least a part of the management display that was displayed before the power was turned off is displayed when the power is turned on even when an operation is canceled. It is a figure. Since the state shown in FIGS. 22 (H) and 22 (1) is the same as the state shown in FIGS. 19 (A) and 19 (3), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIGS. 22 (H) and 22 (2), the power of the game console is turned off in the state where the door body is open and the open is detected and the management display SD is displayed as shown in FIGS. 22 (H) and (1). It is in a state where the power supply is cut off.

In this example, the operation of switching the power of the game console from on to off is performed in the state where the door body is open and the open detection state is displayed and the management display SD is displayed as shown in FIGS. The management display SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) from which the power supply was cut off has disappeared because it was damaged (or there was a power failure due to a power failure or the like).

Subsequent states shown in FIGS. 22 (H) and 22 (3) include an operation of switching the specific operating means (slide switch SW) from on to off in the open state and open detection state of the door body shown in FIGS. 22 (H) and (2). The state in which the operation has been performed (the state in which the operation of the specific operation means (slide switch SW) is released) is followed by the state in which the power of the game console is turned on (power is generated). It is in the state of being supplied).

In this example, the management display SD disappeared because the power was turned off, but in the game console (slot machine) according to this example, the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state. Even if the power is turned off while the management display is displayed and some operation is canceled during the power off period, when the power is turned on, the power is turned off. Since it is configured to display at least a part of the management display that was displayed before, as shown in FIGS. 22 (H) and 22 (5), before the power supply is cut off. The management display SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is redisplayed.

The operation of changing the open / close sensor from the open detection state to the closed detection state (predetermined operation) in the state where the power of the game console shown in FIGS. 22 (H) and 22 (5) is turned on (power is supplied). When this is performed, the management display SD that was displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) before the power supply is cut off may be configured to be redisplayed. It may be configured so that the displayed management display SD is not redisplayed. Further, a part of the management display SD (for example, only the volume setting) displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) before the power supply is cut off is configured to be redisplayed. In addition, when the power of the game console shown in FIGS. 22 (H) and 22 (5) is turned on (power is being supplied), the sound output means (speaker) notifies that the power is turned on. When outputting voice (for example, the voice "power is turned on"), the voice (for example, volume) is different from the normal one (power on / off when the specific operation means (slide switch SW) is off). It may be configured to output a loud voice or a low voice), or it may be configured to output a voice having the same mode as usual.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is provided with a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and the front surface of the game console. A door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detecting means that can detect the opened / closed state of the door body (for example, an opening / closing sensor), and an operating means (for example, FIG. 19A) are shown. A game table provided with a slide switch SW), wherein the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means. Is a means capable of changing the detection state to the open detection state when the door body is in the open state, and shields light from a predetermined operation (for example, a light projecting unit of an open / close sensor) related to the detection means. The door body is configured to be in the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state, and the display means is managed by the administrator. It is a means capable of displaying the display (for example, the display SD for the administrator shown in FIGS. 19A and 19A), and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state. When a certain operation (for example, an operation of switching from off to on) is performed on the operating means, the management display can be started to be displayed, and the door body is in the open state and the detecting means. When the detection state is the closed detection state, the display of the management display cannot be started even if a certain operation is performed on the operation means, the management display is displayed, and the management display is displayed. When an operation is maintained, the power is turned off, and even if the operation is canceled during the period when the power is off, when the power is turned on, the power is turned off. The game console is characterized in that the management display displayed before the above is configured to be displayable even if the certain operation is not performed.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, even if the power is turned on, the management display may be redisplayed, so that the convenience of a manager such as a clerk of a game store can be enhanced.

Further, the operating means may be a means provided at a position where the door body can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the convenience of an administrator such as a clerk of a game store and prevent setting mistakes and the like.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying an initial display (for example, a display including a character string "preparing" that is always displayed when the power is turned on), and when the power is turned on, the power is turned off. The initial display may be configured to be able to start displaying before the management display that was displayed before is displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to know that the power has been turned on, and it is possible to improve the convenience of a manager such as a clerk of a game store.

<Example of starting to display the management display by operating with multiple specific operation means>
In the game table (slot machine) described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22, an example in which one specific operation means (slide switch SW) is applied is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of specific operation is not limited to this. Means may be applied.

FIG. 23 (I) is a diagram showing an example in which the display for management is started by an operation by a plurality of specific operation means in chronological order.

Here, the "specific operation means 1" in FIG. 23 (I) is a case where the first operation means (in this example, the front door (door body) 102) of one of the plurality of types of operation means is in the open state. The slide switch SW) provided at a position where it can only be operated indicates whether it is in the on state or the off state. Further, the "specific operating means 2" is provided at a position where the second operating means (in this example, the front door (door body) 102) can be operated even when the front door (door body) 102 is closed, which is one of the plurality of types of operating means. The effect button (not shown) is shown to be in the on state or the off state.

The first operating means is an operating means (mainly an operating means used by a player) provided at a position where the front door (door body) 102 can be operated even when the front door (door body) 102 is closed, and the second operating means. However, the operation means (mainly the operation means used by the manager of the game store) may be provided at a position where the front door (door body) 102 can be operated only when the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state.

The state shown in FIGS. 23 (I) and 23 (3) is an operation of switching the first specific operating means (effect button) from off to on in the door body open state and open detection state shown in FIGS. 23 (I) and (2). Is in the state where was performed.

In this example, in the door body open state and open detection state shown in FIGS. 23 (I) and 23 (2), the operation (operation of switching from off to on) for the first specific operation means (effect button) is performed. , The error sound (door open) output from the sound output means (speaker) is stopped (silenced), and the error display ED1 (door open) displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), etc. Is turned off to display a display that includes the character string "Preparing".

In the following states shown in FIGS. 23 (I) and 23 (I), the second specific operating means (slide switch SW) is turned from off to on in the door body open state and open detection state shown in FIGS. 23 (I) and (3). The switching operation has been performed.

In this example, in the door body open state and open detection state shown in FIGS. 23 (I) and 23 (3), the operation (operation of switching from off to on) for the second specific operation means (slide switch SW) is performed. Therefore, the display displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the management display SD for the administrator (in this example, various settings (system settings) related to the game console are possible). Is displayed.

FIG. 23 (J) is a diagram showing an example in which a plurality of types of management displays are started to be displayed in chronological order by an operation by a plurality of specific operation means.

Here, the "specific operation means 1" in FIG. 23 (J) is a case where the first operation means (in this example, the front door (door body) 102) of one of the plurality of types of operation means is in the open state. The slide switch SW1) provided at a position where only the operation can be performed indicates whether the slide switch SW1) is in the on state or the off state. Further, the "specific operating means 2" is provided at a position where it can be operated only when the second operating means (in this example, the front door (door body) 102) is one of a plurality of types of operating means. It indicates whether the slide switch SW2) is in the on state or the off state.

In the state shown in FIGS. 23 (J) and 23 (3), the first specific operating means (slide switch SW1) is switched from off to on in the door body open state and open detection state shown in FIGS. 23 (J) and (2). The operation has been performed.

In this example, in the door body open state and open detection state shown in FIGS. 23 (J) and 23 (2), the operation (operation of switching from off to on) for the first specific operation means (slide switch SW1) is performed. The error sound (door open) output from the sound output means (speaker) is stopped (silenced), and the error display ED1 (door open) displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is stopped. Etc. are turned off to display the simple display for the administrator (simple system setting).

Here, the simple display is a display for setting the player's authority to change the volume, setting the range of the volume setting value by the player, and browsing the error historian, etc., which will be described later. This is a display with fewer items that can be set than the detailed display.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIGS. 23 (J) and 23 (J), the second specific operating means (slide switch SW2) is turned on from off in the door body open state and open detection state shown in FIGS. The operation to switch to is performed.

In this example, in the door body open state and open detection state shown in FIGS. 23 (J) and 23 (2), the operation (operation to switch from off to on) for the second specific operation means (slide switch SW2) is performed. The error sound (door open) output from the sound output means (speaker) is stopped (silenced), and the error display ED1 (door open) displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is stopped. Etc. are turned off to display the detailed display (system detailed settings) of the administrator display.

Here, the detailed display is a display for setting the time setting, power saving setting, etc., and viewing the error history, countermeasures, etc., and is a display in which there are more items that can be set than the simple display. be.

The present invention is not limited to this example, and the operation for the second specific operation means (slide switch SW2) is performed in the state where the simple display for the administrator shown in FIGS. 23 (J) and 23 (3) is displayed. When (the operation of switching from off to on) is performed, the detailed display of the administrator display shown in FIGS. (J) and (4) of the same figure may be configured so as to be transitionable.

Further, when the detailed display of the administrator display shown in (J) (4) of the same figure is shifted, the release operation (operation of switching from on to off) of the second specific operation means (slide switch SW2) is performed. Unless otherwise specified, it may be configured so as not to shift to the simple display for the administrator shown in FIGS. (J) and (3).

The configuration of the game console according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the game console according to the above embodiment.

Therefore, for example, the game console according to the present invention (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIGS. 1 and 148) is provided on the display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and the front surface of the game console. A door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 1 and 148) and a detection means that can detect the open / closed state of the door body (for example, an open / close sensor, a magnetic sensor, a proximity switch, a micro switch, etc. A hall element, etc.), a sound output means (for example, the speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 3), and a change operation means (for example, a manager (a game store clerk, etc.)) used for a setting change operation related to the sound output means. (For example, a back knob (rotary switch), a slide switch, etc.), a control means capable of executing payout control of the game medium based on the result of the game (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3), and the game medium. A game table provided with a storage means (for example, a storage device) capable of storage, a settlement operation means (for example, a settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 1), and the change operation means has a closed door body and a closed state. It is a means provided at a position that can be operated only in the open state of the open state, and when the settlement operation means is operated, the game medium stored in the storage means is configured to be able to be settled. The sound output means is a means capable of outputting a payout sound in connection with the payout control, and the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a settlement sound in connection with the settlement of the game medium. The detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means detects when the door body is in the open state. The state is a means capable of being in the open detection state, and by performing a predetermined operation regarding the detection means, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state even if the door body is in the open state. The door body is in the open state and the detection means of the detection means is in the closed detection state, and the payout sound is output (for example, FIG. 16A). When the first operation (for example, the operation of changing the administrator setting value from F to D) is performed on the change operation means in the payout operation shown in (1), the payout sound being output is output. The volume of the door body is configured to change, the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the settlement sound is output (for example, FIG. 16). (A) In the settlement operation shown in (3)) The gaming table may be characterized in that the volume of the settlement sound being output does not change even if the first operation is performed on the changing operation means.

According to the game console according to the present invention, the volume of the payout sound can be adjusted during the payout operation of the medal, but the volume of the payout sound cannot be adjusted during the checkout operation of the medal. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, in a state where the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state and the payout sound is output, a second operation (for example, the change operation means) is performed with respect to the change operation means. , The operation of changing the setting value for the administrator from F to A) is performed, the volume of the payout sound being output is changed, and the door body is in the open state and the detection means. When the second operation is performed on the change operation means in the state where the detection state is the closed detection state and the settlement sound is output, the volume of the settlement sound being output changes. It may be configured to do so.

Further, in a state where the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state and the payout sound is output, the first operation (the first operation for the change operation means). For example, when the operation of changing the setting value for the administrator from F to D) is performed, the volume of the payout sound being output is configured to decrease, and the door body is in the open state and the detection means. The volume of the settlement sound being output even if the first operation is performed on the change operation means in the state where the detection state of is the closing detection state and the settlement sound is output. The change operation means is configured so that the door body does not decrease, the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the payout sound is output. On the other hand, when the second operation is performed, the volume of the payout sound being output is configured to decrease, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state. Even if the settlement sound is being output and the second operation is performed on the change operation means, the volume of the settlement sound being output is reduced. good.

Further, the game console according to the present invention (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIGS. 1 and 18) is provided with a display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 1 and 18) and the front surface of the game console. A door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 1 and 18) and a detection means that can detect the opened / closed state of the door body (for example, the open / close sensor 103 shown in FIG. 18 and a magnetic sensor. Proximity switches, micro switches, hall elements, etc.), notification means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, various lamps 420 shown in FIG. 3, shutters 163 shown in FIG. 1, reels 110 to 112), and the above. A game console provided with a first operating means and a plurality of types of operating means including a second operating means, which are used for changing certain settings (for example, volume setting, light amount setting) related to the notification means. The first operating means is a means provided at a position where the door body can be operated only when the door body is in the closed state or the open state (for example, the administrator switch MSW shown in FIG. 18). It is a back knob (rotary switch), a slide switch, etc. used by a person (a clerk of a game store, etc.), and the second operating means is provided at a position where the door body can be operated even when the door body is in the closed state. The means (for example, the player switch PSW shown in FIG. 18, a cross key having up / down / left / right buttons and a decision button used by the player, an effect button, a touch panel, etc.), and the detection means is the door. When the body is in the closed state, the detection means externally outputs a signal indicating that the detection state is the closed detection state (for example, the detection means is detecting the closed detection state or the closed detection state). The detection means is a means capable of being output toward the door, and the detection means is in the open detection state (for example, the detection means is in the open detection state) when the door body is in the open state. It is a means capable of being in a state of detecting a certain state or a state in which a detection means outputs a signal indicating an open detection state to the outside), and a predetermined operation relating to the detection means. (For example, by pushing in the rod-shaped body, the light from the light projecting portion of the open / close sensor of the main body 101 is blocked, and the detection state is changed to the closed detection state), so that the door body is in the open state. Even if there is, the detection state of the detection means is configured to be the closed detection state, and the display means has a certain setting display (for example, a player setting value PD shown in FIG. 18) relating to the certain setting. Is a means that can be displayed The display means is a means capable of displaying a certain error display when the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the door body is in the closed state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed state. When the door body changes from the closed state to the open state in the detection state and the certain setting display is displayed, the detection state of the detection means changes to the open detection state, and the certain error display. (For example, the front door opening error display ER shown in FIG. 18 (2) and the front door opening error display shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (2)) are configured to be displayed, and the door body is the door body. When the predetermined operation is performed in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state and the certain error display is displayed, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state. (For example, the state shown in FIG. 18 (3)), the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is set. In the closed detection state, the display of the certain setting display can be started (for example, the state shown in FIG. 18 (4)), and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the detection state. In the closed detection state and the certain setting display is displayed, a certain operation (for example, the administrator setting value shown in FIGS. 18 (4) to (5)) is performed with respect to the first operating means. (Operation to change from 2 to 4) is performed so that the certain error display is not displayed (for example, the state shown in FIG. 18 (5)), and the display means is for an administrator. It is a means capable of displaying the management setting display, and is configured so that the display of the management setting display cannot be started when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state. It may be a game table characterized by this.

Further, one or more of the plurality of states described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23 may be combined with the other one or more states, or one or more of the plurality of states may be combined with the other one or more. Alternatively, a new effect may be obtained by exchanging with multiple states. Further, "may be displayed (started)" means that there are times when it is "displayed (started)" and times when it is "not displayed (started)" depending on the conditions.

For example, if the condition is a lottery result, it means "displayed (started)" if the lottery is won, and "not displayed (started)" if the lottery is not won. .. Further, when the condition is a certain gaming state, it is "displayed (started)" when it is in a certain gaming state, and "not displayed (started)" when it is not in a certain gaming state. Means.

The gaming table according to each of the inventions described above can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the "enclosed gaming machine" circulates and uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of each of the inventions described above merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are the practices of the present invention. It is not limited to what is described in the form. Further, among the plurality of configurations described in any of the above embodiments, the content described in one configuration may be applied to another configuration to further expand the range of the game.

<Other embodiments>
Hereinafter, other embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

The slot machine of the present embodiment starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if they do not match, the game medium is used. It is a game table that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 24 to 35 are used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals are shown in the description of the present embodiment. Priority is given to the reference numerals 24 to 35. Moreover, each embodiment of this embodiment and each embodiment of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which multiple types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit of this optical sensor is provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114.

For example, the notification lamp 123 informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in the winning combination internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp to inform you. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment is lit until the bonus game is completed after the bonus notification of notifying the confirmation of the bonus. The notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button capable of starting a certain effect when an operation is accepted. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a production button.

The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. .. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation may be referred to as a third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 as a stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is called "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can grasp that the high navigation state is in the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is in front of the slot machine 100 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding a stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

It should be noted that the device may be configured to be capable of displaying various production images and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 are designed to notify predetermined information by causing the lamps to emit light, but the notification mode is not limited to the light emission of the lamp. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a slot machine having a full liquid crystal display, an area near reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when it is described as lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190, it is intended to include notification by another effect device (for example, a display device or the like) having the same function.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine will be described. The control unit of the slot machine can be roughly divided into a main control unit that controls the progress of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit to control the main effects. It is composed of a first sub-control unit to be performed and a second sub-control unit that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit.

The main control unit includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit, and enables communication with the first sub control unit. Information communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit is one-way communication, and the main control unit can send commands and other signals to the first sub control unit, but the first sub control unit controls the main control. Cannot send signals such as commands to the unit.

The first sub-control unit includes a basic circuit that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit based on the control command. The first sub-control unit controls sound output means (speaker, sound source IC, etc.), various lamps, and the like.

The second sub-control unit includes a basic circuit that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit based on the control command. The second sub-control unit controls the liquid crystal display device and the like.

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be described.

The symbol displayed on the upper row of the left reel is the symbol on the upper row of the left reel, the symbol displayed on the middle row of the left reel is the symbol on the middle row of the left reel, the symbol displayed on the lower row of the left reel is the symbol on the lower row of the left reel, and the symbol on the upper row of the middle reel. The displayed symbol is the middle reel upper symbol, the symbol displayed in the middle reel is the middle reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed in the lower middle reel is the middle reel lower symbol, and the symbol displayed in the right reel is the upper symbol. The design displayed on the upper part of the right reel and the middle part of the right reel is called the middle part of the right reel, and the design displayed on the lower part of the right reel is called the lower part of the right reel. A total of nine are displayed on each reel, three in the vertical direction.

In the present embodiment, one winning line of the middle-stage winning line composed of the left reel middle-stage symbol, the middle-reel middle-stage symbol, and the right-reel middle-stage symbol is provided. The winning line is a line set at the stop position of the symbol that can be visually recognized through the symbol display window, and is a line for determining whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed. The valid winning line (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium.

The slot machine of this embodiment can play a 3-card or 2-card bet, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 2, no winning line is valid and 3 or 2 medals are inserted. The winning line becomes valid when bet. When the winning line is activated, the game can be started by operating the start lever.

Further, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line, it is composed of a right-down winning line consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol, and a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. A total of three winning lines rising to the right may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines according to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b). It should be noted that FIG. 3A is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts (number of grants) of each winning combination, and remarks, and is shown in FIG. ) Is a diagram showing the types of the normal push order bell and the privilege push order bell, and the payout corresponding to each push order.

A plurality of types of symbols (for example, replay symbol, watermelon symbol, cherry symbol, bell symbol, etc. shown in FIG. 25 (a)) are arranged in a predetermined number of frames (for example, 20 frames) on each reel 110 to 112. ..

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special roles (special role 1, special role 2) and general roles (replaying role, small role 1 to small role 4, normal push order bell, privilege push order bell), etc. There is. The types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are roles for shifting to a special gaming state in which a predetermined benefit is given to the player. In addition, the replaying role is a role that enables replaying without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations may be referred to as "acting combinations". Further, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of the medal (without the payout of the medal) is displayed on the valid line, for example, the special combination 1, Includes winnings for special role 2 and replaying role.

The special role 1 and the special role 2 are a combination (actuating role) that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a prize. In this example, the special role 1 is a role that can be won only in the three-card betting game, and the special role 2 is a role that can be won only in the two-card betting game. No medals will be paid out due to winning the role itself. As for the corresponding symbol combination, for example, the special role 1 (BB1) is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2", and the special role 2 (BB2) is "BAR-BAR-Seven 1".

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 1, the main control unit shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 1 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 2, the main control unit shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3).

This flag remains on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game that is internally won in the special role 1 or the special role 2, the special role is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special). If the role 1 is internally won, the "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)" symbol combination) will be in a state where it is easy to win. The special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2. Further, in this special gaming state, when a predetermined number of cards (in this example, 110 cards are won by BB1 and 55 cards are won by BB2) are paid out, a re-game low probability state (hereinafter, this state is referred to as RT1). There is).

The "re-gaming role" is a winning role (acting role) that allows a game to be played without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize, and the medal is not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay".

"Small role (small role 1 to small role 4)" is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combination is "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for small role 1 (watermelon). The role 2 (cherry) is as shown in FIG. 25 (a), such as "cherry-ANY-ANY". The corresponding payout number is also as shown in the figure.

In addition, small role 1 (watermelon) and small role 2 (cherry) are roles that can be won by operating the correct answer timing, and in the case of "cherry-ANY-ANY", the design of the left reel 110 is "cherry". It is sufficient, and the symbols of the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 indicate that any symbol may be used. In addition, although the details will be described later, the small role 3 and the small role 4 are the roles that can be won by the operation of the correct answer pressing order. In some cases.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. For reel stop control, one of a plurality of types of reel stop control data determined in advance is selected based on a predetermined condition (result of the internal lottery process of the winning combination), and based on the selected reel stop control data. conduct.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slip control) is performed. The pull-in control is to shift the stop position of the reels 110 to 112 within a certain number of frames (number of symbols) range (pull-in range; here, maximum 4 frames) after each stop button 137 to 139 is operated by the player. Refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM of the main control unit. Each reel stop data has a permissible control that allows a predetermined combination of winning combinations to be displayed together on the winning line, and a prohibition control that does not display all the symbol combinations of any winning combination on the winning line. It is roughly divided into.

Examples of allowable control are, for example, when an internal winning combination is internally won or when a special winning combination is being internally won (the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is bad, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are displayed together within the range of the above number of frames. However, since it is only "allowed", the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each stop button 137 to 139.

For example, when the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is internally won, the watermelon symbol is arranged over 4 frames, so if the timing to operate the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon symbol will be on the winning line. Do not stop.

However, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of frames drawn in, 100% may be aligned. For example, since the arrangement interval of the replay symbols corresponding to the replay combination is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination is internally elected, 100% of the prizes will be won regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, as an example in which the prohibition control is performed, for example, the internal lottery result is lost and the special role is not being internally elected (the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is good, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are not displayed together within the range of the above number of frames.

<Pushing order bell>
Next, the normal push order bell and the privilege push order bell will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 25 (b).

<Normal push order bell>
If any of the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" is internally won, multiple small wins (in this example, small wins 3 and small wins 4) are won in duplicate, depending on the player's operation order. The symbol combination displayed on the winning line is determined. In addition, regardless of the set value of any of the settings 1 to 6, it is possible to internally win the "normal push order bells 1 to 6". In addition, you may make duplicate winnings by combining further small winning combinations.

As shown in FIG. 25 (b), each of the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" has six types of "LCR", "LRC", "CLR", "CRL", "RLC", and "RCL". It is subdivided into the pressing order (operation order) of, and in this example, 12 small winning combinations (small winning combination 3) are assigned to one of the six types of pressing order. The range of lottery data associated with each of the six types of push order is the same.

For example, when the "normal push order bell 1 LCR" of the "normal push order bell 1" is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right. The stop operation on the reel 112 is the correct answer operation (correct answer pressing order), and the other stop operations are incorrect answer operations (incorrect answer pressing order). If the "normal push order bell 4CRL" is internally won among the "normal push order bells 4", the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left. The stop operation on the reel 110 is the correct answer operation (correct answer pressing order), and the other stop operations are incorrect answer operations (incorrect answer pressing order).

When the stop operation (correct answer pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order to win the 12-card small role (small role 3), the "bell-" corresponding to the small role 3 "Bell-Bell" will be displayed on the winning line and 12 medals will be paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect release order operation) that does not follow the 12-card acquisition navigation is performed, the "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to one small role (small role 4) wins a prize. If it is displayed on the line and one medal is paid out, or if the small winning combination 4 is missed (if the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line), the medal is paid out. It will not be removed (it will be lost).

In addition, when the stop operation (correct answer pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring one card) that suggests the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4), the "small winning combination 4" corresponds to ". "Bell-Bell-Replay" is displayed on the winning line, and if one medal is paid out or the small winning combination 4 is missed (the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line). In some cases), the medal will not be paid out (it will be lost).

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect release order operation) that does not follow the one-card acquisition navigation is performed, the "bell-bell-bell" corresponding to the small winning combination 3 will be on the winning line depending on the operation order. 12 medals are paid out, or "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to the small role 4 is displayed on the winning line, and 1 medal is paid out, or the small role 4 is missed. (If the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line), the medal will not be paid out (it will be lost).

In the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" of this example, since 12 small wins (small wins 3) are assigned to one of the six types of push orders, "normal push order bells 1 to 6" If you win an internal prize in any of the above, there is a 1/6 chance that 12 medals will be paid out. The winning probability of the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not limited to this example, and may be larger than 1/6.

<Bonus push order bell>
If any of the "Bonus Push Order Bells 1 to 6" is internally won, multiple small wins (in this example, small wins 3 and small wins 4) will be won in duplicate, depending on the player's operation order. The symbol combination displayed on the winning line is determined. In addition, regardless of the set value of any of the settings 1 to 6, it is possible to internally win the "privilege push order bells 1 to 6". In addition, you may make duplicate winnings by combining further small winning combinations. Further, the combination of small winning combinations may be different between the normal push order bell and the privilege push order bell.

As shown in FIG. 25 (b), each of the "privilege push order bells 1 to 6" has six types of "LCR", "LRC", "CLR", "CRL", "RLC", and "RCL". In this example, one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) is assigned to one of the six types of pressing order, and the six types of pressing order are set. Twelve small roles (small role 3) are assigned to five of them. The range of lottery data associated with each of the six types of push order is the same.

For example, when the "privilege push order bell 1 LCR" of the "privilege push order bell 1" is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right. The stop operation on the reel 112 is the correct answer operation (correct answer pressing order), and the other stop operations are incorrect answer operations (incorrect answer pressing order). If the "Bonus Push Order Bell 4 CRL" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left. The stop operation on the reel 110 is the correct answer operation (correct answer pressing order), and the other stop operations are incorrect answer operations (incorrect answer pressing order).

When the stop operation (correct answer pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring one card) that suggests the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4), the "bell-" corresponding to the small winning combination 4 "Bell-Replay" is displayed on the winning line and one medal is paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect release order operation) that does not follow the 1-card acquisition navigation is performed, the "Bell-Bell-Bell" corresponding to the 12-card small role (small role 3) will win a prize. Displayed on the line.

In addition, when the stop operation (correct answer pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order for winning the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3), the "small winning combination 3" corresponds to ". "Bell-Bell-Bell" will be displayed on the winning line and 12 medals will be paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect release order operation) that does not follow the 12-card acquisition navigation is performed, "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is displayed on the winning line. One medal will be paid out.

In the "privilege push order bells 1 to 6" of this example, 12 small wins (small win 3) are assigned to 5 of the 6 types of push orders, so "privilege push order bells 1 to 6". If you win an internal prize in any of the above, there is a 5/6 chance that 12 medals will be paid out. The winning probability of the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not limited to this example, and may be larger or smaller than 5/6. In addition, even if any of the privilege push order bells 1 to 6 is internally won, the payout will not be zero. Therefore, it is easy for the player to notice that he has won the privilege push order bell.

<Advantageous section, non-advantageous section>
Next, the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 26A. FIG. 26A is a diagram schematically showing an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100.

The slot machine 100 has a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section that is more advantageous to the player than this non-advantageous section. After the power is turned on or after the set value is changed, a non-advantageous section is set as an initial state, and when the advantageous section transition condition is satisfied in this non-advantageous section (for example, when a re-game combination is won in a certain game). In addition, an advantageous section is set from the next game.

In addition, when the non-advantageous section transition condition is satisfied in this advantageous section (for example, when the AT state shifts from the normal state to the AT state and the AT state ends, or when the limiter is reached, etc.), the game will not be performed from the next game. The advantageous section is set, and the navigation count counter 2 is initialized to 0.

Here, the navigation count counter 2 is a counter that indicates the total number of times of navigation (navigation for acquiring one card executed when the privilege push order bell is internally won) in the advantageous section, and has shifted from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section. It is initialized to 0 when the case or RAM clear is executed, and 1 is added every time the navigation is executed in the advantageous section. Although the details will be described later, this navigation count counter 2 is used when the numerical value of the navigation count counter 2 is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

<Type of game state>
Next, the gaming state and transition of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 26 (b). FIG. 26B is a diagram showing an example of the transition of the gaming state of the slot machine 100.

The slot machine 100 has, apart from the above-mentioned advantageous section and non-advantageous section, a normal state, a first chance state, a second chance state, and a gaming state including at least an AT state.

<Normal state>
After turning on the power or changing the set value, the normal state is set as the initial state. When the condition for shifting to the first chance state is satisfied in this normal state (in this example, when the navigation count counter 1 reaches 50), the game shifts to the first chance state from the next game. It is a state that includes a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section.

Here, the navigation count counter 1 is a counter that indicates the total number of executions of the privilege push order bell navigation (navigation for acquiring one sheet), and is used when the first chance state is changed to the normal state or the RAM is cleared. Is initialized to 0 when you execute, etc., and every time you perform a navigation (navigation for acquiring 1 card) that suggests the operation order to win the privilege push order bell and win a prize in 1 small role (small role 4). 1 is added to. Although the details will be described later, this navigation count counter 1 is used when calculating the navigation compliance rate, when displaying the numerical value of the navigation count counter 1 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the like.

In addition, when the condition for transition to the second chance state is satisfied in the normal state (in this example, when the lottery for transition to the second chance state (for example, the lottery with a winning probability of 1/300) is won), the next time. Move from the game of No. to the second chance state. Further, when the condition for shifting to the AT state is satisfied in the normal state (in this example, when the navigation number counter 2 reaches 300), the game shifts to the AT state from the next game.

<First chance state>
The first chance state is a state in which it is possible to shift to the second chance state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. In this example, the first chance state is 5 games (fixed), and each game is a lottery to decide whether or not to shift to the second chance state (a lottery to shift to the second chance state. This example. Then, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/5) will be performed.

When the condition for transition to the second chance state is satisfied in this first chance state (in this example, when the lottery for transition to the second state is won), the next game is changed to the second chance state. Transition. In addition, when the condition for transition to the normal game is satisfied in the first chance state (in this example, when the lottery for transition to the second chance state is not won), the game shifts to the normal game from the next game. At the same time, the navigation count counter 1 is initialized to 0.

<Second chance state>
The second chance state is a state in which an AT lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the AT state is performed, and is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal state and the first chance state. In this example, the second chance state is 5 games (fixed), and a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the AT state for each game (AT transition lottery. In this example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/10). )I do.

When the condition for shifting to the AT state is satisfied in this second chance state (in this example, when the AT transition lottery is won), the game shifts to the AT state from the next game. In addition, when the transition condition to the normal game is satisfied in the second chance state (in this example, when the AT transition lottery is not won), the game shifts to the normal game from the next game.

In this example, the configuration does not shift from the AT state to the second chance state, but it may be possible to shift, and in this case, since it is the second chance state via the AT state, the AT transition lottery is won. The probability is halved regardless of the navigation compliance rate described later, and it is preferable that the game playability is different from that of the second chance state that does not go through the AT state.

<AT state>
The AT state is a state in which AT games can be played a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 games per set), which is more advantageous to the player than other game states.

In this AT game, a set continuous lottery for whether or not to continue the AT game (for example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/4) is executed at the start game of the AT game, and if the set continuous lottery is won, a predetermined number of times (for example, a lottery for continuing the AT game) is executed. In this example, an AT game (30 games per set) is given, and the AT state is extended.

When the condition for shifting to the normal game is satisfied in this AT state (in this example, when all the games in the AT state are digested), the game shifts to the normal game from the next game.

The privilege given to the player in the AT state is not limited to the granting of the AT game, and for example, the period of the AT game may be extended (for example, extended from 30 games to 40 games), or the period in the AT state. You may increase the winning probability of the extended lottery (for example, increase from 10% to 20%), or increase the entry rate to the specialized zone (extension decision-only period) in the AT state (for example, increase from 20% to 30%). ), The extension decision rate in the AT state may be increased (for example, an average of 10 games added to an average of 30 games added), or the navigation rate in the AT state may be increased (for example, from 80% to 100%). May be raised).

<Navigation compliance rate>
Next, the navigation compliance rate will be described with reference to FIG. 27.

In the game table according to the present embodiment, when the privilege push order bell is won in the normal state, the navigation (navigation for acquiring one card) suggesting the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) is performed. , Add 1 to the navigation count counter 1. Then, when the player performs an operation according to the navigation for acquiring one sheet, it is treated as if the correct answer pressing order operation has been performed, and 1 is added to the correct answer operation counter indicating the number of times of the correct answer pressing order operation. When an operation that does not follow the one-sheet acquisition navigation is performed, it is treated as if an incorrect answering order operation was performed, and 1 is not added to the correct answer operation counter.

In this example, the navigation count counter 1 and the correct answer operation counter are updated during the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state, and the correct answer operation counter is divided by the navigation count counter 1. The navigation compliance rate is calculated, and based on this navigation compliance rate, the winning probability of the transition lottery in the first chance state and the second chance state and the winning probability of the set continuous lottery in the AT state are changed.

Further, in this example, there are a case where the stop operation according to the one-sheet acquisition navigation is continued for a certain period and a case where the stop operation not following the one-sheet acquisition navigation is continued for a certain period. Is designed so that the interests of the players are almost the same over a long period of time. In addition, if the stop operation according to the one-card acquisition navigation is continued, the amount of medals consumed will increase in normal times, but it will be advantageous in later games, but the stop operation that does not follow the one-card acquisition navigation. If you continue, the amount of medals consumed will decrease during normal times, but it will not be advantageous in later games.

For this reason, the player has no choice but to finish in front of the ceiling by separating the stop operation according to the one-card acquisition navigation and the stop operation not following the one-card acquisition navigation according to his / her budget. It is possible to reduce the situation where the game is finished without hitting, and the player's willingness to play is not diminished.

The navigation compliance rate may be calculated by another method. For example, the number of times the player does not follow the navigation for acquiring one card may be determined for every 100 games, and if the number of times is 0, the player may reset (set the navigation compliance rate to 100%). In this case, it may be possible to make it less likely to be affected by the game history of other players. Alternatively, the number of times the player does not follow the one-card acquisition navigation may be simply counted, and the winning probability may be changed according to the count value. In this case, the processing load related to the calculation may be reduced. This is the same in other states.

The winning probability of the transition lottery in the first chance state and the second chance state and the winning probability of the set continuous lottery in the AT state are based on other numerical values instead of (or in addition to) the navigation compliance rate. It may be changed. For example, even if the navigation compliance rate is low, if the number of operation mistakes is small, it may be treated as having a high navigation compliance rate.

<Navigation compliance rate and transition lottery (first chance state)>
FIG. 27A is a diagram showing the relationship between the navigation compliance rate and the winning probability of the transition lottery in the first chance state.

As mentioned above, in the first chance state, if you win the 1/5 winning probability transition lottery, you will shift to the second chance state from the next game, but if the navigation compliance rate exceeds 90%. Increases the winning probability of the transition lottery from 1/5 to 1/3, and when the navigation compliance rate is 70 to 90%, increases the winning probability of the transition lottery from 1/5 to 1/4, and navigates. If the compliance rate is less than 70%, the winning probability of the transition lottery is maintained.

That is, in the first chance state, if the navigation compliance rate in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state) is high, the winning probability of the transition lottery Will be higher, and it will be easier to move to the second chance state.

In other words, if you win the privilege push order bell in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state), one piece that is disadvantageous to the player. The more you perform the correct answer pressing order operation according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring one piece) that suggests the operation order to make the small role (small role 4) win, the higher the probability of winning the transition lottery, and the transition to the second chance state. It will be easier to do.

With such specifications, the player will operate according to the navigation in order to increase the navigation compliance rate in order to increase the probability of transition to the second chance state, so that the designer of the game table It is possible to realize the ball ejection rate and playability in line with the intention of.

The ease of transition from the first chance state to the second chance state may be the same regardless of the navigation compliance rate. Further, when the operation is performed according to the navigation (when the navigation compliance rate is high), the matter related to the second chance state determined in the first chance state may be configured to be advantageous, for example, the second chance. You may extend the length of the state period (resulting in easier transition to AT status) or increasing the ease of winning the second chance status lottery (resulting in transition to AT status). May be easier).

<Navigation compliance rate and transition lottery (second chance state)>
FIG. 27B is a diagram showing the relationship between the navigation compliance rate and the winning probability of the transition lottery in the second chance state.

As mentioned above, in the second chance state, if you win the 1/10 winning probability transition lottery, you will transition to the AT status from the next game, but if the navigation compliance rate exceeds 90%, you will transition. The winning probability of the lottery is increased from 1/10 to 1/8, and when the navigation compliance rate is 70 to 90%, the winning probability of the transition lottery is increased from 1/10 to 1/9, and the navigation compliance rate is increased. If it is less than 70%, the winning probability of the transition lottery is maintained.

That is, in the second chance state, if the navigation compliance rate in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state) is high, the winning probability of the transition lottery Will be higher, and it will be easier to shift to the AT state.

In other words, if you win the privilege push order bell in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state), one piece that is disadvantageous to the player. The more the correct answer pressing order operation is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring one card) that suggests the operation order for winning the small role (small role 4), the higher the winning probability of the transition lottery and the easier it is to shift to the AT state. ..

With such specifications, the player will operate according to the navigation in order to increase the navigation compliance rate in order to increase the probability of transition to the AT state, so it is the intention of the designer of the game table. It is possible to realize the payout rate and playability along with it.

<Navigation compliance rate and set continuous lottery (AT state)>
FIG. 27C is a diagram showing the relationship between the navigation compliance rate in the AT state and the winning probability of the set continuous lottery.

As described above, in the AT state, if the set continuation lottery with a winning probability of 1/4 is won, an AT game of 30 games per set is given and the AT state is extended, but the navigation compliance rate is 90%. If it exceeds, the winning probability of the set continuous lottery will be increased from 1/4 to 1/2, and if the navigation compliance rate is 70 to 90%, the winning probability of the set continuous lottery will be increased from 1/4 to 1/3. If the navigation compliance rate is less than 70%, the winning probability of the set continuous lottery is maintained.

That is, in the AT state, if the navigation compliance rate in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state) is high, the probability of winning the set continuous lottery is high. Therefore, the AT game is likely to be given in the AT state.

In other words, if you win the privilege push order bell in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state), one piece that is disadvantageous to the player. The more the correct answer pressing order operation is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring one card) that suggests the operation order for winning the small winning combination (small winning combination 4), the easier it is for the AT game to be given in the AT state.

With such specifications, the player will operate according to the navigation in order to increase the navigation compliance rate in order to increase the probability of continuing the set, which is in line with the intention of the game table designer. It is possible to realize the payout rate and playability.

<Various navigation>
Next, various types of navigation will be described with reference to FIG. 28.

<Various navigation / non-AT state>
FIG. 28A is a diagram showing an example of various navigation systems in a non-AT state.

In this example, in the non-advantageous section (non-AT state), even if the privilege push order bell is won, the navigation (1 piece acquisition) suggesting the operation order to win one small role (small role 4). Navi) and Navi (Navi for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order for winning a prize in the 12-card small role (Small role 3) are not executed.

This non-advantageous section (non-AT state) is extremely likely to stay after the setting is changed (immediately after the opening of the game store), and is a period in which it is difficult to immediately shift to the AT state. That is, since it is a disadvantageous period for the player compared to the advantageous section, by not performing navigation in this non-advantageous section, it is easier to win a prize in 12 small wins (small win 3) (5/6). There is a probability of winning 12 small roles (small role 3).

On the other hand, in the advantageous section (non-AT state), when the normal push order bell is won, the navigation suggesting the operation order to win one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) (navigation for acquiring one pushing order). , And the navigation that suggests the operation order to win the 12-card small role (small role 3) (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) is not executed, but if the privilege push order bell is won, a part of it With the exception of, it is configured to execute a navigation (navigation for acquiring one card) that suggests an operation order for winning a prize in one small winning combination (small winning combination 4).

In this advantageous section (non-AT state), when the privilege push order bell is won, the normal push order bell is won in the AT state because the player wants to strongly urge the player to operate according to the navigation for acquiring one card. The notification mode is different from that of the 12-sheet acquisition navigation (for example, the navigation described later using FIG. 28 (c)) performed in the case.

Specifically, in the AT state, a sound effect (navigation sound) different from the 12-sheet acquisition navigation performed when the normal push order bell is won is output, and a display suggesting the operation order (RCL in this example) is displayed. By surrounding the surroundings with the effect image EF, the player is strongly urged to operate according to the navigation for acquiring one image.

The mode of the one-card acquisition navigation performed when the privilege push order bell is won in the advantageous section (non-AT state) is not particularly limited, and for example, the color of the navigation image may be different (for example,). If the image of the navigation for acquiring 12 sheets, which is performed when the normal push order bell is won in the AT state, is black, it may be displayed in red). Further, the display position of the navigation image may be different (for example, when the position of the image of the 12-sheet acquisition navigation performed when the normal push order bell is won in the AT state is below the display area, the display is displayed. It may be displayed in the center of the area). In addition, it is preferable to turn on the dedicated lamp or turn off the lamp that is always lit so that the player can easily notice it.

FIG. 28B is a diagram showing an example of various navigations in an advantageous section (non-AT state).

As described above, in the advantageous section (non-AT state), the navigation is not performed when the normal push order bell is won, so the execution frequency of the navigation in the advantageous section (non-AT state) is lower than that in the AT state. For this reason, in the advantageous section (non-AT state), the player who is accustomed to the operation of the conventional machine is prejudiced that the navigation is not executed, and even if the navigation is performed, the inertia There is a possibility that the forward push operation (incorrect push order operation) will be performed with.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), when a role other than the privilege push order bell (for example, a replaying role) is won, the navigation should be performed in the same manner as when the privilege push order bell is won. For example, by increasing the frequency of navigation execution and impressing the player with the execution of the navigation, it is possible to reduce the erroneous operation of the player and increase the satisfaction of the player. When the player wins the re-game combination, the navigation may be performed every time, or the navigation may be performed an appropriate number of times (for example, about once every three times). Even when navigating when the re-game role is won, the navigation at the time of winning the re-game role is irrelevant to the navigation compliance rate, and the navigation is more important than when the privilege push order bell is won. Since the degree is low, the effect image EF for alerting may be configured not to be displayed.

In addition, even if you do not win the prize (in the case of loss), if you configure it to perform navigation in the same way as when you win the privilege push order bell, you can increase the frequency of navigation and execute navigation. By impressing the player, it is possible to reduce the erroneous operation of the player and increase the satisfaction of the player. In the case of loss, the navigation may be performed every time, or the navigation may be performed an appropriate number of times (for example, about once in five times).

<Various navigation / advantageous section (AT state)>
FIG. 28 (c) is a diagram showing an example of various navigations in an advantageous section (AT state).

In the advantageous section (AT state), if the normal push order bell is won, with some exceptions, the navigation that suggests the operation order to win the 12-card small role (small role 3) (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) ) Is executed.

Although not shown, when the player operates according to the navigation for acquiring 12 medals, a sound effect (payout sound) is output when 12 medals are paid out, and 12 medals are paid out. A display suggesting that the process has been performed (for example, a display including the character string "Get 12 sheets") is performed.

In addition, in the advantageous section (AT state), even if the privilege push order bell is won, 12 small wins (small win 3) are used in the same manner as when the normal push order bell is won, with some exceptions. It is configured to execute a navigation (a navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests an operation order for winning a prize.

In addition, even if an incorrect release order operation is performed due to an operation error or the like and a prize is won in the 12 small winning combination (small combination 3), the sound effect (payout sound) is performed in the same manner as when the correct answer pressing order operation is performed. ) Is output, and a display suggesting that 12 cards have been paid out (for example, a display including the character string "Get 12 cards") is displayed. Since the AT state is a state in which many medals are given to the player, even if the player performs an incorrect release order operation, if the player can obtain 12 medals, the correct answer order is obtained. By performing the same effect as the operation, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from diminishing in the AT state.

In this example, when the privilege push order bell (for example, the privilege push order bell 1) is won, any one of the five push orders excluding the 12-card acquisition navigation (for example, the LCR push order) I configured to execute one), but when selecting one of multiple types of 12-card acquisition navigation, if the navigation is selected by lottery, a bias will occur in the push order. There is no such thing, and fairness can be guaranteed.

Further, when selecting any one of a plurality of types of 12-card acquisition navigation, a predetermined navigation may be executed. For example, when the privilege pressing order bell 1 is won, the privilege pressing order may be executed. If the navigation (predetermined navigation) that is executed when the bell 2 is won is executed, the control burden related to the determination of the push order can be reduced.

In addition, during the AT game, navigation that reduces the operation conditions (for example, navigation that reduces the number of push order options, navigation that reduces the difficulty of operation by widening the push range, etc.) may be executed. For example, when the privilege push order bell 1 is won in a game other than the AT game, the so-called 6-choice push order navigation that specifies the order of the LCR is executed, while the privilege push order bell 1 is won in the AT game, "First By executing the so-called three-choice push order navigation that specifies "stop the middle reel", the player can easily perform the operation during the AT game, and the satisfaction of the player can be enhanced.

In addition, if one, multiple, or all of the processes for executing a predetermined navigation or the processing for executing a navigation with fewer operating conditions during AT games are applied, the push order can be determined. While reducing the control burden involved, it is possible to reduce the operation mistakes of the player during the AT game and increase the satisfaction of the player.

<Navigation counter>
Next, the navigation count counter will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a display example of the navigation count counter.

The state shown in FIG. 3 (i) is a state in which the display of the navigation is started. In this example, each stop button 137 to 139 is pressed in the reverse operation order (LCR) based on the winning of the privilege pressing order bell 6. The navigation that prompts the operation and the display of the effect image EF have started.

Further, in the same state, the value of the current navigation count counter 1 is displayed on the counter 1 display area CT1 provided in the upper right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the counter 2 provided below the counter 1 display area CT1. The numerical value of the current navigation count counter 2 is displayed in the display area CT2.

Although the numerical value of the counter 1 and the numerical value of the counter 2 are the display of the numerical value that matches the numerical value stored internally, the numerical value that does not match the numerical value stored internally may be displayed. For example, immediately after the power is turned on, both the numerical value of the counter 1 and the numerical value of the counter 2 display 0, so that they may not match the numerical value stored internally.

As described above, the navigation count counter 1 is a counter indicating the total number of times the privilege push order bell navigation is executed. In this example, the total number of times the privilege push order bell navigation is executed at the start of the game is 1. Therefore, the numerical value 1 is displayed. Further, the navigation count counter 2 is a counter indicating the total number of navigations in the advantageous section. In this example, since the total number of navigations in the advantageous section at the start of the game is 14, a numerical value of 14 is displayed. ing.

The following state shown in the figure (ii) is a state in which the first stop operation (pressing operation of the stop button 139) is performed with the first stop reel as the right reel 112, and in this example, the first stop operation is performed. Since it was accepted, the navigation that prompts the first stop operation (right) (the image in which 1 is circled in this example) is deleted and the navigation that prompts the second stop operation (middle) (in this example, 2 is circled). Image) is enlarged.

The state shown in the following figure (iii) is a state in which the second stop operation (pressing operation of the stop button 138) is performed with the second stop reel as the middle reel 111, and in this example, the second stop operation is performed. Since it was accepted, the navigation that prompts the second stop operation (middle) (the image in which 2 is circled in this example) is deleted and the navigation that prompts the third stop operation (left) (in this example, 3 is circled). Image) is enlarged.

The state shown in the following figure (iv) is a state in which the third stop operation (pressing operation of the stop button 137) is performed with the third stop reel as the left reel 110, and in this example, the third stop operation is performed. Since it was accepted, the navigation (in this example, the image in which 3 is circled) prompting the third stop operation (left) and the effect image EF are deleted.

In addition, in the same state, since one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) was won, the payout process of paying out one medal is executed, and the display suggesting the payout of the medal (in this example, one payout). Display including the character string of "+1" suggesting) has started. In this example, only one medal is paid out, and the number of medals is reduced in the game. Therefore, even if the stop operation is performed in the correct operation order, the medal is paid out. Is configured not to output a payout sound (sound effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

In addition, by the payout process of paying out one medal, it is determined that the player has performed the correct answer pressing order operation according to the navigation, and one small winning combination (small combination 4) has been won by the correct answer pressing order operation. The suggestion display (in this example, the display including the character string "success") has started.

The state shown in the following figure (v) is the state after the payout of medals is completed. In this example, the display (+1) suggesting the payout of medals and the correct answer pressing order operation are used to make one small winning combination (small winning combination). The display (success) suggesting that the prize was won in 4) is deleted.

Further, since the total number of times the navigation of the privilege push order bell is executed (navigation number counter 1) is added by one in the game, the numerical value 2 (= 1 + 1) is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1. Since the value of the navigation count counter 1 displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1 is added by one even when an operation other than the correct answer pressing order operation is performed due to an operation error or the like, the player's willingness to play the game. Can be prevented from declining more than necessary.

Further, since the total number of times of navigation in the advantageous section (navigation number counter 2) is added by one in the game, the counter 2 display area CT2 numerical value 15 (= 14 + 1) is displayed. The value of the navigation count counter 2 displayed in the counter 2 display area CT2 is added by one even if a winning combination other than the privilege push order bell is won (for example, based on the winning of the replaying combination). Since there is a case of navigating, etc.), it is possible to increase the update frequency of the display of the navigation number counter 2, and the player can proceed with the game at a good tempo while appropriately enhancing the effect.

<Navigation execution period>
Next, the execution period of the navigation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30A is a diagram showing an example of a navigation execution period and a non-execution period.

As described with reference to FIG. 28 (a), in the advantageous section (non-AT state), when the normal push order bell is won, the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) is suggested. Navi (navigation for acquiring 1 card) and navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order to win a prize in 12 small roles (small role 3) are configured not to be executed. The period T2b shown in FIG. 30A indicates a period during which navigation is not executed.

On the other hand, in the advantageous section (non-AT state), when the privilege push order bell is won, with some exceptions, the navigation (1) suggesting the operation order to win one small role (small role 4). It is configured to execute the sheet acquisition navigation), and the period T1a shown in FIG. 30A indicates the period for executing the sheet acquisition navigation.

In addition, when the transition to the AT state is confirmed, that is, when the transition condition to the AT state is satisfied in the second chance state in this example (in this example, when the AT transition lottery is won), or When the transition condition to the AT state is satisfied in the normal state (in this example, when the navigation count counter 2 reaches 300), even if the privilege push order bell is won, the navigation for acquiring one card The period T1b shown in FIG. 30A indicates a period during which the navigation for acquiring one sheet is not executed (a period during which the AT confirmation is notified).

In this period T1b (the period during which the AT confirmation is notified), as shown in FIG. While displaying a video related to AT confirmation), it is configured not to execute the navigation for acquiring one sheet.

In the period T1b (the period during which the AT confirmation is notified), the AT game has not started, but reducing the number of balls is disadvantageous to the player, so by not executing the navigation for acquiring one card, 12 Make it easier to win a prize in the single role (small role 3). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player without giving an excessive disadvantage to the player.

Depending on the skill of the player, there is a possibility that more 1-card combination (small combination 4) will be won than 12-card combination (small combination 3) (from the start of AT confirmation notification to the start of AT game). In that period, the number of medals to be paid out will be reduced.) Therefore, if it is determined that the number of medals to be paid out is small, the number of medals to be paid out will be reduced. It may be configured to perform a navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 medals) that suggests an operation order for winning a small winning combination (small winning combination 3).

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the feeling of unfairness among the players and increase the satisfaction of the players. During this time, when the normal push order bell is won, a navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests an operation order for winning a prize in a 12-card small role (small role 3) may be executed, and it is judged that the number of payouts is small. If this is the case, the possibility of increasing the number of payouts at an early stage can be increased.

Further, as described with reference to FIG. 28 (c), in the advantageous section (AT state), with some exceptions, when the normal push order bell is won, 12 small wins (small win 3). It is configured to execute a navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 sheets) that suggests an operation order for winning a prize, and the period T2a shown in FIG. 30 (a) indicates a period for executing the navigation for acquiring 12 sheets. ..

In addition, in the advantageous section (AT state), with some exceptions, even if the privilege push order bell is won, the navigation (12 cards acquired) suggesting the operation order to win the 12 small roles (small role 3). It is configured to execute the navigation for acquisition), and the period T1c and the period T1e shown in FIG. 30A indicate the period for executing the navigation for acquiring 12 sheets.

In the period T1c, as shown in the figure (c), while performing AT during AT notification (in this example, displaying a moving image related to AT state) to notify that AT is in progress, 12-sheet acquisition navigation is executed. It is configured to do. With such a configuration, the player's willingness to play during AT can be further enhanced.

Similarly, in the period T1e, as shown in the figure (e), the ending notification (in this example, the display of the moving image related to the ending) is performed to notify that the ending period of the AT is reached, and 12 images are acquired. It is configured to execute the navigation system. With such a configuration, even in the ending period when the end of the AT state is near, the player can comfortably proceed with the game, and the player's motivation to play can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in a certain period (in this example, the period of continuous judge of AT) in the advantageous section (AT state), even if the normal push order bell is won or the specific push order bell is won. It is configured not to execute the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order for winning the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3), and the period T2c and the period T1d shown in FIG. 30 (a) are 12 Indicates the period during which the navigation for acquiring sheets is not executed.

In the period T1d, as shown in the figure (d), the AT continuation judge effect for notifying that the AT continuation judge is in progress (in this example, the display of a moving image regarding the presence / absence of the AT set continuation. For example, the following set is displayed. It is configured not to execute the navigation for acquiring 12 cards, while performing the production (the production that shows whether or not to execute it by the conclusion (victory or defeat) of the battle production). With such a configuration, the display of the navigation does not hinder the visibility of the AT continuation judge effect, and the player can fully enjoy the effect.

Depending on the skill of the player, there is a possibility that more 1-card combination (small combination 4) will be won than 12-card combination (small combination 3), so the number of medals to be paid out will be managed during this period. If it is determined that the number of medals to be paid out is small, a navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 medals) that suggests the operation order for winning the 12 small medals (small medals 3) is performed when the privilege push order bell is won. It may be configured as follows.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the feeling of unfairness among the players and increase the satisfaction of the players. During this time, when the normal push order bell is won, a navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests an operation order for winning a prize in a 12-card small role (small role 3) may be executed, and it is judged that the number of payouts is small. If this is the case, the possibility of increasing the number of payouts at an early stage can be increased.

<Modification example>
Next, a modified example of the game table according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 35.

<Mode in normal game>
FIG. 31 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a mode in a normal state and a count value of the navigation count counter 2 corresponding to each mode, and FIG. 31 (b) is a diagram showing a navigation compliance rate and a lottery for each mode. It is a figure which showed an example of a value.

In this example, the normal game is provided with three modes 1 to 3. When the transition condition to the normal game is satisfied in the AT state (in this example, when all the games in the AT state are digested), the lottery data shown in FIG. Based on the above, any one of modes 1 to 3 is selected by lottery, and when the normal state is entered, the mode is shifted to the mode selected by lottery.

Here, the mode 1 is a mode in which the transition to the AT state is confirmed when the counter value of the navigation count counter 2 reaches 500 in the normal state. Further, the mode 2 is a mode in which the transition to the AT state is confirmed when the counter value of the navigation count counter 2 reaches 400 in the normal state. Further, the mode 3 is a mode in which the transition to the AT state is confirmed when the counter value of the navigation count counter 2 reaches 300 in the normal state.

For example, if the navigation compliance rate at the end of the AT state exceeds 90%, mode 1 is selected with a probability of 50/100, mode 2 is selected with a probability of 30/100, and mode 2 is selected with a probability of 20/100. Select mode 3 with probability.

If the navigation compliance rate at the end of the AT state is in the range of 70% to 90%, mode 1 is selected with a probability of 70/100, mode 2 is selected with a probability of 20/100, and 10 /. Mode 3 is selected with a probability of 100.

If the navigation compliance rate at the end of the AT state is less than 70%, mode 1 is selected with a probability of 90/100, mode 2 is selected with a probability of 5/100, and a probability of 5/100 is selected. Select mode 3.

That is, in this example, the higher the navigation compliance rate at the end of the AT state, the easier it is to select the mode (mode 3 in this example) that facilitates the transition to the AT state. With such a configuration, the player will operate according to the navigation in order to increase the navigation compliance rate in order to facilitate the transition to the AT state, which is in line with the intention of the designer of the game table. It is possible to realize the payout rate and playability.

<Modification example of display of navigation counter>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display of the navigation count counter.

In the above embodiment, even when an operation other than the correct operation order is performed due to an operation error or the like, 1 is added to the navigation count counters 1 and 2 to display the added value. In this example, when an operation other than the correct answer pressing order operation is performed due to an operation error or the like, 1 is not added to the navigation count counters 1 and 2. The numerical values of the navigation counters 1 and 2 are display of numerical values that match the numerical values stored internally.

Specifically, the state shown in FIG. 3 (i) is the state in which the navigation display is started. In this example, each stop button 137 to 139 is reverse-pressed based on the winning of the privilege pressing order bell 6. The navigation that prompts the operation in order (LCR) and the display of the effect image EF are started.

Further, in the same state, since the total number of times of navigation of the privilege push order bell at the start of the game is 1, a numerical value of 1 is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1 and the navigation in the advantageous section at the start of the game is performed. Since the total number of times of integration is 14, the numerical value 14 is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT2.

The following state shown in the figure (ii) is a state in which the first stop operation (pressing operation of the stop button 137) is performed by an operation other than the correct answer pressing order operation, and in this example, 12 small winning combinations (small winning combination). Since neither 3) nor one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) was won, the navigation and effect image EF are deleted, and the payout process causes the player to not follow the navigation and perform the correct answer pressing order operation. It is determined that the stop operation of is performed, and the display suggesting that the image is lost (in this example, the display including the character string "failure") is started.

The state shown in the following figure (iii) is the state after the winning determination, and the display (failure) suggesting that the prize is lost is erased.

Further, in the game, an operation other than the correct push order operation is performed, and the total number of times the privilege push order bell is executed (navigation count counter 1) is not added. Therefore, a numerical value 1 is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1. However, since the total number of times of navigation in the advantageous section (navigation number counter 2) is not added, the counter 2 display area CT2 numerical value 14 is displayed.

In the above embodiment, when the player performs an operation according to the navigation for acquiring 12 medals, an example of outputting a sound effect (payout sound) when paying out 12 medals is shown. In this example, since operations other than the correct operation order (unrecommended operations) have been performed, sound effects (payout sounds) should not be output even if a single winning combination (small combination 4) is won. It is composed.

In this example, as a result of operations other than the correct answer pressing order operation, it is possible to reduce the number of balls, so the process of changing the transition probability to the second chance state or AT state based on the navigation compliance rate, It is not necessary to perform the process of changing the probability of set continuation. Therefore, the control load on the game console can be reduced. It should be noted that, if the game property is such that the game state is changed according to the numerical values of the navigation counters 1 and 2, the game property can be less affected by the operation error of another player.

<Example of modification of navigation execution period>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a modified example of the execution period of the navigation.

In the above embodiment, in the advantageous section (AT state), with some exceptions, when the normal push order bell is won, the navigation for acquiring 12 cards is executed, and even when the privilege push order bell is won. , An example of executing the navigation for acquiring 12 sheets is shown. However, as shown in the figure (i), when the normal push order bell is won in the period T2a1, the navigation for acquiring 12 sheets is executed 100%. Even if the privilege push order bell is won in the period T1c1, the navigation for acquiring 12 cards may be configured to be executed 100%.

Further, as shown in the figure (ii), in the advantageous section (AT state), if the normal push order bell is won in the period T2a2, the navigation for acquiring 12 cards is executed 100%, and the privilege push is performed in the period T1c2. If the forward bell is won, 100% of the navigation (for example, "? -1-?" Is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157) that notifies only the first stop operation in the correct answer operation order is executed. It may be configured as follows.

With such a configuration, the probability of winning a 12-card small role (small role 3) is reduced from 5/6 to 1/2, so the difficulty of winning can be increased and the correct operation order is guessed. It is possible to have sex and improve playability. In this case, the first stop operation may be performed on a stop button other than the stop button on the middle reel, but these operations do not pose a problem if they are treated as incorrect operations.

Further, as shown in the figure (iii), in the advantageous section (AT state), if the normal push order bell is won in the period T2a3, the navigation for acquiring 12 cards is executed 100%, and the privilege push is performed in the period T1c3. If the order bell is won, the navigation for acquiring 12 cards may not be executed.

With such a configuration, the probability of winning a 12-card small role (small role 3) is 5/6, so it is practically the same as when executing a 12-card acquisition navigation, but the navigation is executed. The frequency of the display can be reduced, and the display of the navigation does not hinder the visibility of the effect during the AT state (for example, the ending effect), so that the player can fully enjoy the effect.

<Variation example of navigation>
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a modified example of the navigation.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which a game with a small number of balls is played by executing a navigation for acquiring one card in an advantageous section (non-AT state), but as in this example, a small winning combination 1 (watermelon) If you win the game, you may configure it to execute a navigation that does not allow the small role 1 (watermelon) to win a prize.

Specifically, the state shown in the figure (i) is the state in which the display of the navigation is started, and in this example, it corresponds to the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) based on the winning of the small winning combination 1 (watermelon). Navi (in this example, "Caution") that prompts you to perform a stop operation (dropping watermelon) so that the combination of symbols to be used ("watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" in this example) is not displayed on the winning line. The display including) and the effect image EF are started.

The state shown in the following figure (ii) is a state in which the third stop operation (pressing operation of the stop button 139) is performed with the third stop reel as the right reel 112, and in this example, the third stop operation is performed. Since it was accepted, the navigation and effect image EF that prompt the watermelon to be dropped are deleted.

In addition, it is determined by the payout process that the player has performed a stop operation so as to drop the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) according to the navigation, and a display suggesting that the watermelon has been dropped (in this example, "success"". Display including the character string of) has started.

With such a configuration, by controlling the display of the navigation system, it is possible to play a game with a small number of balls, and it is possible to realize a ball ejection rate and playability in line with the intention of the game table designer. It will be possible.

The same navigation may be performed for the small role 2 (cherry), which is the missing role, or the same navigation may be performed for both the small role 1 (watermelon) and the small role 2 (cherry). Further, both the small role 1 (watermelon) and the small role 2 (cherry) can be dropped even if there is no navigation for prompting the drop, so that the playability may be such that the navigation is not performed. Even if there is no navigation that encourages omission, by executing a predetermined specific operation mode for each game, if the game performance is such that more omissions can occur compared to the case where the specific operation mode is not executed for each game, this specification is specified. The advantage can be changed by using the result of directly or indirectly determining that the operation mode of is executed. Since it is not necessary to change the operation mode every game, it is possible to make the game playability less likely to cause an operation error. Further, by setting the internal winning probability of the winning combination when the specific operation mode is performed to be lower than the internal winning probability of the winning combination when the other operation mode is performed, the specific operation mode can be set. By executing each game, it is possible to reduce the frequency of winning a prize as compared with the case where a specific operation mode is not executed every game.

<Transformation example of AT state>
FIG. 35 (a) is a diagram showing a modified example of the AT state, and FIG. 35 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an AT end screen displayed during the AT extension period.

In the above embodiment, the AT state is set to 30 games per set, but as in this example, when there is a push order error (operation other than the correct push order operation) in one set (30 games), the push is made. The number of games in the AT state may be increased according to the order error to extend the AT state.

Specifically, as shown in the figure (a), there are X push order mistakes (operations other than the correct push order operation of the 12-card combination) in one set (30 games), and the 12-card combination is played. If it is missed, the AT state may be extended until the 12-card combination wins X times.

If the AT state is extended until the 12-card winning combination is won by the number of push order mistakes (X times in this example), the profit given to the player may become excessive due to the winning of other winning combination. Therefore, the AT state may be extended until the 12-card winning combination is won less than the number of push order mistakes (X times in this example).

Further, when the AT state is extended, the display displayed at the end of one set (30 games) (for example, the AT end screen as shown in FIG. 3B) is continuously displayed. Since the extension period of the AT state is uncertain and the frequency of extension is low, it is configured not to prepare a special display for extension. In addition, in order to clarify the total number of medals to be paid out, a display indicating the total number of medals to be paid out may be displayed on the AT end screen.

In the advantageous section (non-AT state), it is possible to increase the number of payouts by performing an operation that does not follow the navigation for acquiring one card, so the player who notices this can also do so in the advantageous section (AT state). There is a possibility of performing operations that do not follow the navigation. Therefore, as in this example, if the AT state is extended until the 12-card combination is won by the number of push order mistakes, the player's profit can be secured in the extended ATT state. It is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player.

As described above, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reel 110 shown in FIG. 24) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and are rotationally driven. ~ 112) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, respectively. An internal lottery means (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to one or more winning combination or losing, and the inside after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the lottery result derived by the lottery means, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed and the stop control means. Game value giving means (for example, medal payout processing) for giving game value according to the stopped mode of the plurality of stopped reels, and operation information for notifying operation information (for example, operation navigation) in the AT state. It is a game table provided with a notification means and a game control means (for example, a process of transitioning a game state) capable of controlling the progress of a game and changing the advantage, and the game control means is the first. It is possible to set one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a gaming state (for example, a normal state) and a second gaming state (for example, an AT state) different from the first gaming state. The first game state is terminated and the second game state is set based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, winning the AT transition lottery) while the game state is set. It is a possible means, and when a specific lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, the stop operation of the stop button is the first operation. The game is more likely to be performed by a second operation (for example, a stop operation such as LCR) according to a second operation condition than by a first operation according to an operation condition (for example, a stop operation of RCL). A large amount of value (for example, a medal) can be obtained, and the game control means performs a stop operation of the stop button when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state. The smaller the number of times the second operation is performed, the more the advantage regarding the second gaming state may be changed to a higher advantage, and the second gaming state is the AT. It is a game table characterized by being in a state.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous for the AT state to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation, so that the first game state. It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium.

It should be noted that "the more times the stop operation of the stop button is performed in the second operation, the lower the advantage of the second gaming state is changed" means "stop of the stop button". The number of times the operation is performed in the second operation is not limited to the content that "the advantage of the second gaming state is" always "changed to a lower advantage", but "the stop button". The more the number of times the stop operation is performed in the second operation, the more "may" change the advantage regarding the second gaming state to a lower advantage "" is included (described later). The same applies to the game console).

Therefore, for example, the second operation may be performed three times and four times, and the advantage regarding the second gaming state may be set to the same advantage, or the number of times performed in the second operation is four. As a result, the number of times may be set to a higher degree of advantage regarding the second gaming state than the third time due to other factors (for example, lottery, etc.), and further, the first time may be set. Even if the number of times performed in the second operation is 0 (for example, 0 operation error), the advantage regarding the second gaming state may not change.

Further, the "specific lottery result" according to the present invention is not limited to a single lottery result (for example, privilege push order bell 1), but is one of a plurality of lottery results (for example, privilege push order bell 1). It may be any one of 6) (the same applies to the game console described below).

Therefore, for example, when the small winning combination X, the small winning combination Y, and the small winning combination Z are set as a specific small winning combination group, and the small winning combination X, the small winning combination Y, or the small winning combination Z is internally elected, the specific small winning combination group is internally elected. (The "specific lottery result" according to the present invention has been derived), the small winning combination X is a winning combination when the left reel is the first stop reel, and the small winning combination Y is the middle reel. It is a winning combination when the one-stop reel is used, the small winning combination Y is a winning combination when the right reel is the first stop reel, and the small winning combination X is compared with the small winning combination Y and the small winning combination Z. , The winning combination is set to have a low internal winning probability, and the small winning combination X, the small winning combination Y, and the small winning combination Z may have the same number of medals (for example, 8) to be paid out when a prize is won.

With such a configuration, if the game in which the left reel is the first stop reel (the game in which the first operation is performed) is continued, the number of medals paid out by the player is reduced, and the middle reel or the right reel is used. If you continue the game with the first stop reel (the game that performed the second operation), the number of medals paid out by the player will increase, but if you continue the game with the left reel as the first stop reel. In addition, games such as AT games can be changed advantageously.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24) which are subjected to a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of them has one or more functions. Alternatively, an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) and, after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, are derived by the internal lottery means. Based on the lottery result, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means stopped by the stop control means. A game value giving means for giving a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout process), an operation information notifying means for notifying an operation information in an AT state, and a game progress are controlled. , A game table equipped with a game control means (for example, a process of transitioning a game state) capable of changing the advantage, and the state before the AT state is described includes a normal state and a chance state. The chance state is a state in which it is easier to shift to the AT state than the normal state, and the game control means is different from the first gaming state (for example, the normal state) and the first gaming state. One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least two game states (for example, a second chance state), and a predetermined condition is satisfied in the state where the first game state is set. It is a means capable of ending the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state based on the fact (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and in the first gaming state, the said When a specific lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means, the stop operation of the stop button is the first operation according to the first operation condition (for example, the stop operation of RCL). ) Is performed by the second operation according to the second operation condition (for example, a stop operation such as LCR), the game value (for example, a medal) can be obtained more, and the game control can be obtained. In the first gaming state, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the stop operation of the stop button is performed less frequently in the second operation. However, it is a means for changing the advantage of the second gaming state to a high advantage, and the second gaming state is the chance state.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is better to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation because the advantage regarding the chance state is increased, so that the first game state. It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24) which are subjected to a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of them has one or more functions. Alternatively, an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) and, after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, are derived by the internal lottery means. Based on the lottery result, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means stopped by the stop control means. A game value giving means for giving a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout process), an operation information notifying means for notifying an operation information in an AT state, and a game progress are controlled. , A game table provided with a game control means (for example, a process of transitioning a game state) capable of changing the advantage, and the state before the AT state is described includes a normal state and a chance state. The chance state includes a first chance state and a second chance state, and the second chance state is a state in which it is easier to shift to the AT state than the normal state, and the first chance state. Is a state in which the higher the advantage is, the easier it is to shift to the second chance state, and the game control means is different from the first game state (for example, the normal state) and the first game state. One gaming state can be set from a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state (for example, a first chance state), and a predetermined condition is satisfied in the state where the first gaming state is set. It is a means capable of ending the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state based on the fact (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and in the first gaming state. The setting is set after the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the operation result of the stop button of the player when a specific lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means. It is a means capable of changing the advantage with respect to the second gaming state, and the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state. In that case, the stop operation of the stop button is a second operation (for example, LCR, etc.) according to the second operation condition rather than the first operation (for example, RCL stop operation) according to the first operation condition. The game value (for example, a medal) can be obtained more in the case of the stop operation), and the game control means is the specific lottery result by the internal lottery means in the first game state. Is derived, the smaller the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed in the second operation, the higher the advantage of the second gaming state may be changed. The second gaming state is a gaming table characterized in that it is a state for shifting to the first chance state.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation in terms of the state for shifting to the chance state. , It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation in the first game state, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24) which are subjected to a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of them has one or more roles. Alternatively, an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) and, after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, are derived by the internal lottery means. Based on the lottery result, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means stopped by the stop control means. A game value giving means (for example, medal payout processing) for giving a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels, an operation information notifying means for notifying an operation information in an AT state, and a game progress are controlled. , A game table including a game control means (for example, a process for transitioning a game state) capable of changing the advantage, wherein the game control means is a first game state (for example, a normal state) and the game state. It is possible to set one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state (for example, AT state) different from the first game state, and it is predetermined in the state where the first game state is set. It is a means capable of ending the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state based on the fact that the condition of (for example, winning the AT transition lottery) is satisfied. When a specific lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means in one gaming state, the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the first operation (for example, according to the first operation condition). For example, the game value (for example, a medal) can be obtained more when the second operation according to the second operation condition (for example, the stop operation such as LCR) is performed rather than the stop operation of RCL). In the game control means, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation is the number of times. The larger the number, the more the advantage regarding the second gaming state is changed to a lower advantage, the second gaming state is the AT state, and the first gaming state is the AT state. A plurality of types of modes having different advantages with respect to the transition (for example, modes 1 to 3 shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B) are included, and the game control means performs a stop operation of the stop button. As the number of times performed in the second operation is smaller (for example, the higher the navigation compliance rate is), the mode in the first gaming state may be changed to the mode having a higher advantage in the transition to the AT state. It is a game table characterized by being a means.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is better to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation because the advantage regarding the second advantageous state is increased. It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation in the game state of the above, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium. In addition, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is easier for the player to shift to the AT state if the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the first operation. The operation can be promoted, and it becomes possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium.

Further, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, it is possible to execute a notification for causing the stop operation of the stop button to be performed by the first operation. May be good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the first operation by performing a notification prompting the first operation in the first gaming state.

Further, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second gaming state, a notification for causing the stop operation of the stop button to be performed by the second operation (for example, acquisition of 12 cards). Navi) may be executable.

With such a configuration, in the second gaming state, it is possible to impress the player that the second operation is advantageous by performing the notification prompting the second operation with high player profit. At the same time, it is possible to give a player profit,
Further, in the game in which the notification is executed, a count value indicating the number of times the notification is executed may be displayed.

With such a configuration, the number of times the notification is executed can be visually grasped, and the player's willingness to operate can be improved.

Further, the specific lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, a normal push order bell) and a second lottery result (for example, a privilege push order bell) different from the first lottery result. When the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the second lottery result is derived as compared with the case where the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. In this case, when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation, more of the game value can be obtained, and in the first game state, the second by the internal lottery means. When the lottery result is derived, it may be possible to execute the notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation.

With such a configuration, the player's profit can be obtained even when the second operation that does not follow the notification is performed, so that the player's dissatisfaction even if the notification prompts the first operation. Can be resolved.

<Navigation count>
Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24) which are subjected to a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of them has one or more functions. Alternatively, an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) and, after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, are derived by the internal lottery means. Based on the lottery result, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means stopped by the stop control means. A game value granting means (for example, a medal payout process) that grants a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels, a game control means that controls the progress of a game (for example, a process of transitioning a game state), and The game control means is a game table provided with a first game state (for example, a normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, AT state, second state). One gaming state can be set from a plurality of gaming states including at least a chance state, a first chance state), and a predetermined condition is satisfied in the state where the first gaming state is set (for example,). It is a means capable of ending the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state based on (winning the AT transition lottery), and the second gaming state is the first gaming state. When a specific lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state, the stop operation of the stop button is performed. Is performed by the second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) according to the second operation condition rather than the first operation according to the first operation condition (for example, stop operation of RCL). However, when the game value (for example, a medal) can be obtained in large numbers and the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the number of times the stop button is stopped by the second operation. The greater the number, the greater the number of games until the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, it is updated when the first operation is performed. Reel cow The game table is characterized in that it can display an operation value (for example, the numerical values of the navigation counters 1 and 2 shown in FIG. 29).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous for the AT state to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation, so that the first game state. It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium. Further, since the count value updated when a specific lottery result is derived is displayed, it is possible to grasp the lottery result and maintain the player's willingness to play.

Further, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, a notification for causing the stop operation of the stop button to be performed by the first operation (for example, one-card acquisition navigation, 12-card acquisition navigation). Navi) may be executable.

With such a configuration, the stop operation can be notified, and the player's willingness to operate can be improved.

Further, the certain count value may be a count value indicating the number of times the stop operation is performed according to the notification in the game in which the notification is executed.

With such a configuration, the number of times the notification is executed can be visually grasped, and the player's willingness to operate can be improved.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24) which are subjected to a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of them has one or more functions. Alternatively, an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) and, after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, are derived by the internal lottery means. Based on the lottery result, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means stopped by the stop control means. A game value giving means (for example, a medal payout process) that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels, and a game control means (for example, a game state) that can control the progress of the game and change the advantage. A game table including a first game state (for example, a normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, for example). , AT state, second chance state, first chance state) can be set from a plurality of gaming states, and a predetermined condition can be set in the state where the first gaming state is set. It is a means capable of ending the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state based on the satisfaction (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and is the means capable of setting the second gaming state. When a specific lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means in the state, the player performs the stop operation of the stop button in the first operation according to the first operation condition (for example, For example, the game value (for example, a medal) can be obtained more when the second operation according to the second operation condition (for example, the stop operation such as LCR) is performed rather than the stop operation of RCL). In the game control means, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation is the number of times. The smaller the number, the more the advantage related to the second gaming state may be changed to a higher advantage, and when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the stop bob. It is possible to execute a notification (for example, a navigation for acquiring one sheet, a navigation for acquiring 12 sheets) for performing the stop operation of the tongue by the first operation or the second operation, and in the game in which the notification is executed. , A game table characterized in that it is possible to display a certain count value to be updated (for example, the numerical value of the navigation number counter 2 shown in FIG. 29).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous for the AT state to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation, so that the first game state. It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium. Further, since the count value indicating the number of times the notification is executed is displayed, the number of times the notification is executed can be visually grasped, and the player's willingness to operate can be improved.

Further, the game control means may be a means for changing the advantage in the game to a higher advantage as the certain count value becomes larger.

With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to operate according to the navigation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium.

Further, the specific lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, a normal push order bell) and a second lottery result (for example, a privilege push order bell) different from the first lottery result. When the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the second lottery result is derived as compared with the case where the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. In this case, when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation, more of the game value can be obtained, and at least the first by the internal lottery means in the first game state. When the second lottery result is derived, it may be possible to execute the notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation.

With such a configuration, the player's profit can be obtained even when the second operation that does not follow the notification is performed, so that the player's dissatisfaction even if the notification prompts the first operation. Can be resolved.

<Navigation non-execution period>
Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24) which are subjected to a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of them has one or more functions. Alternatively, an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) and, after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, are derived by the internal lottery means. Based on the lottery result, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means stopped by the stop control means. A game value giving means (for example, a medal payout process) that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels, and a game control means (for example, a game state) that can control the progress of the game and change the advantage. A game table including a first game state (for example, a normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, for example). , AT state, second chance state, first chance state) can be set from a plurality of gaming states, and a predetermined condition can be set in the state where the first gaming state is set. It is a means capable of ending the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state based on the satisfaction (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and is the means capable of setting the second gaming state. When a specific lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means in the state, the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the first operation (for example, RCL) according to the first operation condition. The game value (for example, a medal) can be obtained more when the second operation according to the second operation condition (for example, the stop operation such as LCR) is performed rather than the stop operation (for example). When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the game control means reduces the number of times the stop button is stopped by the second operation. It is a means that may change the advantage of the second gaming state to a higher advantage, and the gaming control means has a specific period in the first gaming state (for example, FIG. 28A). When the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation in the non-advantageous section shown), it is a means not included in the number of times to change the advantage regarding the second gaming state. It is a game table to play.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous for the AT state to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation, so that the first game state. It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium. In addition, since there is a period in which the advantage is not changed, the game can be sharpened and the player's willingness to play can be sustained.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24) which are subjected to a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of them has one or more functions. Alternatively, an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) and, after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, are derived by the internal lottery means. Based on the lottery result, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means stopped by the stop control means. A game value giving means (for example, a medal payout process) that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels, and a game control means (for example, a game state) that can control the progress of the game and change the advantage. A game table including a first game state (for example, a normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, for example). , AT state, second chance state, first chance state) can be set from a plurality of gaming states, and a predetermined condition can be set in the state where the first gaming state is set. It is possible to end the first gaming state and set the second gaming state based on the satisfaction (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and in the first gaming state, the said When a specific lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means, the stop operation of the stop button is the first operation according to the first operation condition (for example, the stop operation of RCL). ) Is performed by the second operation according to the second operation condition (for example, a stop operation such as LCR), the game value (for example, a medal) can be obtained more, and the game control can be obtained. When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, the second is that the number of times the stop button is stopped by the second operation is smaller. It is a means that may change the advantage of the game state to a high advantage, and the game control means performs a stop operation of the stop button in a specific period in the first game state. When performed by the second operation, it is a means not included in the number of times to change the advantage regarding the second gaming state, and the specific period is a specific effect (for example, FIG. 30 (b)). It is a game table characterized in that it is a period during which the AT confirmation effect (shown in 1) is being executed.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous for the AT state to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation, so that the first game state. It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium. In addition, since there is a period in which the advantage is not changed, the game can be sharpened and the player's willingness to play can be sustained.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24) which are subjected to a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of them has one or more functions. Alternatively, an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) and, after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, are derived by the internal lottery means. Based on the lottery result, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means stopped by the stop control means. A game value imparting means (for example, a medal payout process) that grants a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels, and a game control means (for example, a game control means that can control the progress of the game and change the advantage in the game. , A process for transitioning the game state), wherein the game control means is a first game state (for example, a normal state) and a second game different from the first game state. It is possible to set one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least states (for example, AT state, second chance state, first chance state), and the first gaming state is specified by the internal lottery means. When the lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived, the stop operation of the stop button is second than the first operation (for example, the stop operation of RCL) according to the first operation condition. A larger amount of the game value (for example, a medal) can be obtained when the second operation according to the operation conditions (for example, a stop operation such as LCR) is performed, and the game control means is the first. When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the gaming state, the smaller the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed in the second operation, the more advantageous the second gaming state. It is a means that may change the degree to a high degree of advantage, and the game control means is a specific period in the second gaming state (for example, a period T1d shown in FIG. 30A; a continuous judge period in the AT state). When the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation, it is not included in the number of times to change the advantage regarding the second gaming state. It is a game table characterized by being.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous for the AT state to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation, so that the first game state. It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium. In addition, since there is a period in which the advantage is not changed, the game can be sharpened and the player's willingness to play can be sustained.

Further, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second gaming state, it is possible to execute the notification for causing the stop operation of the stop button to be performed by the second operation. , The notification may not be executed for a certain period in the second gaming state.

With such a configuration, the game can be sharpened and the player's willingness to play can be sustained.

Further, the specific period may be a period in which the change in the game value given to the player is smaller than the period other than the specific period.

With such a configuration, the game can be further sharpened, and the variation of the game can be increased.

Further, when the total amount of the game value given in the specific period is less than a certain amount, the stop operation of the stop button is performed when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means. It may be possible to execute the notification to be performed by the second operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid giving a disadvantage to the player, and it is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player.

Further, the specific lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, a normal push order bell) and a second lottery result (for example, a privilege push order bell) different from the first lottery result. When the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the second lottery result is derived as compared with the case where the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. In this case, when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation, more of the game value can be obtained, and at least the first by the internal lottery means in the first game state. When the second lottery result is derived, it may be possible to execute the notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation.

With such a configuration, the player's profit can be obtained even when the second operation that does not follow the notification is performed, so that the player's dissatisfaction even if the notification prompts the first operation. Can be resolved.

<Navigation when other prize-winning roles are won>
Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24) which are subjected to a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of them has one or more functions. Alternatively, an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) and, after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, are derived by the internal lottery means. Based on the lottery result, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means stopped by the stop control means. A game value giving means (for example, a medal payout process) that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels, and a game control means (for example, a game state) that can control the progress of the game and change the advantage. A game table including a first game state (for example, a normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, for example). , AT state, second chance state, first chance state), which is a means capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states, and is specified by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state. When the lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived, the stop operation of the stop button is second than the first operation (for example, the stop operation of RCL) according to the first operation condition. A larger amount of the game value (for example, a medal) can be obtained when the second operation according to the operation conditions (for example, a stop operation such as LCR) is performed, and the game control means is the first. When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the gaming state, the smaller the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed in the second operation, the more advantageous the second gaming state. It is a means that may change the degree to a high degree of advantage, and when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the first. It is possible to execute the first notification (for example, the navigation for acquiring one image with the effect image EF shown in FIG. 28B) to be performed by the operation, and the first gaming state. In order to cause the stop operation of the stop button to be performed by the first operation even when a lottery result (for example, a replay combination, a loss) different from the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means. The second notification (for example, the acquisition navigation for one image without the effect image EF shown in FIG. 28B) can be executed, and the second notification and the first notification are at least a part of the embodiments. Is the same game table.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous for the AT state to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation, so that the first game state. It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium. Further, even when a lottery result different from a specific lottery result is derived, the notification is given, so that the player can play the game at a good tempo.

Further, in the game in which the first notification is executed, a count value indicating the number of times the first notification is executed may be displayed.

With such a configuration, the number of times the notification is executed can be visually grasped, and the player's willingness to operate can be improved.

Further, the game control means may be a means for changing the advantage in the game to a higher advantage as the count value is larger.

With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to operate according to the navigation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium.

Further, the specific lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, a normal push order bell) and a second lottery result (for example, a privilege push order bell) different from the first lottery result. When the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the second lottery result is derived as compared with the case where the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. In this case, when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation, more of the game value can be obtained, and at least the first by the internal lottery means in the first game state. When the second lottery result is derived, it may be possible to execute the notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation.

With such a configuration, the player's profit can be obtained even when the second operation that does not follow the notification is performed, so that the player's dissatisfaction even if the notification prompts the first operation. Can be resolved.

<Navigation in AT state>
Further, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24) which are subjected to a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven. , A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of them has one or more functions. Alternatively, an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to the loss (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) and, after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, are derived by the internal lottery means. Based on the lottery result, the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process) for stopping the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, and the stop control means stopped by the stop control means. A game value giving means (for example, a medal payout process) that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels, and a game control means (for example, a game state) that can control the progress of the game and change the advantage. A game table including a first game state (for example, a normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, for example). , AT state, second chance state, first chance state) can be set from a plurality of gaming states, and a specific lottery result (in the first gaming state) by the internal lottery means ( For example, when the privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived, the stop operation of the stop button is set to the second operation condition rather than the first operation according to the first operation condition (for example, the stop operation of RCL). The game value (for example, a medal) can be obtained more when the second operation (for example, a stop operation such as LCR) is performed according to the procedure, and the game control means is the first game state. When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the smaller the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation, the higher the advantage regarding the second gaming state. It is a means that may be changed to an advantage, and the specific lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, a normal push order bell) and a second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, a normal push order bell). For example, when the bonus push order bell) is included and the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. Further, when the second lottery result is derived and the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation, more of the game value can be obtained, and the second When the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the game state of the above, a notification (for example, a navigation system for acquiring 12 cards) for causing the stop operation of the stop button to be performed by the first operation is provided. It is feasible, and when the second lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second gaming state, the notification for causing the stop operation of the stop button to be performed by the second operation (for example). , A game table characterized by being able to execute a navigation system for acquiring 12 cards.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous for the AT state to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation, so that the first game state. It is possible to urge the player to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the addition of the game value such as the payout of the game medium. Further, in the second gaming state, in both the case where the first lottery result is derived and the case where the second lottery result is derived, the notification for performing in the second operation is performed. In the second gaming state, it is possible to easily acquire the gaming value without worrying about the lottery result, and it is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player.

Further, when the first lottery result (for example, the privilege pushing order bell 1) is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the first operation. When the second lottery result (for example, the privilege pushing order bell 2) is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the stop operation of the stop button can be executed. It may be possible to execute the notification for performing the second operation.

Further, the second gaming state may be an AT state.

With such a configuration, in the AT state, it is possible to easily acquire the game value without worrying about the lottery result, and it is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player.

Further, the notification executed when the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second game state and the second lottery result by the internal lottery means in the second game state. The notification executed when is derived may have the same notification mode.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily acquire the game value without being aware of the stop operation, and it is possible to increase the satisfaction level of the player.

The game console according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine 100 according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "first gaming state" and the "second gaming state" according to the present invention may be a combination of different gaming states, for example, a normal state, a CZ state, an AT state, a specialized zone, and the like. In addition to the ED state, it may be a combination of game states such as RT, AT, ART, bonus, AT and ART pullback zone.

Further, "satisfaction of a predetermined condition" according to the present invention is not limited to winning the AT lottery, for example, the number of games has reached the predetermined number of games, and the number of points is the default number of points. It includes the fact that the game has been reached, that the player has won (or won a prize) internally in the specified condition device, and that the conditions for ending the bonus have been met.

Further, the combination of "first game state"-> "predetermined condition is satisfied"-> "second game state" according to the present invention is changed to "normal game"-> "AT lottery winning"-> "AT state". Not limited, for example, "CZ state"-> "AT lottery winning"-> "AT state", "Bonus"-> "AT lottery winning"-> "AT state", "Normal state"-> "Number of games is default" "The number of games has been reached"-> "AT state", "AT state"-> "The number of games has reached the default number of games"-> "Special zone", "Normal game"-> "The number of points has reached the default number of points" "Reached"-> "AT state", "AT state"-> "The number of points has reached the default number of points"-> "Special zone", "AT state"-> "The number of points has reached the default number of points" → "Pseudo-bonus", "Normal state" → "Internal winning (or winning) in a predetermined condition device" → "AT state", "Normal state" → "Internal winning (or winning) in a predetermined condition device) "Done"-> "Bonus", "Bonus"-> "Bonus end condition is satisfied"-> "Normal state", "Bonus"-> "Bonus end condition is satisfied"-> "AT state", etc. ..

Further, the "operation result of the stop button" according to the present invention is not limited to the timing when the player presses the left reel, for example, the timing when the middle reel or the right reel is pressed, and the pressing order of the stop buttons (forward pressing, forward pressing, It also includes symbols (or symbol combinations) that have been stopped and displayed by operating the (reverse press) and stop buttons.

Further, the "ease of acquiring game value" according to the present invention is not limited to the ease of adding the number of AT games, for example, the ease of adding the difference number in AT and the acquisition of the number of AT sets. Ease of entry into the special zone, high / low frequency of push order bell navigation, ease of transition to good RT on ART machines (high / low probability of push order promotion replay navigation), good RT Ease of transition to, ease of replay navigation execution frequency, ease of continuation of a state where game value is easy to acquire (for example, AT, ART, RT, bonus), state where game value is easy to acquire (for example) It may be easy to shift to AT high probability, AT specialization zone).

Further, the game console according to the present invention is provided with a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) which are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven, and the reels are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels. An internal lottery that derives one lottery result from a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a plurality of types of lottery results each corresponding to one or more combinations or misses. After the means (for example, the winning combination internal lottery) and the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed is stopped based on the lottery result derived by the internal lottery means. A stop control means (for example, reel stop control) that controls the stop to be stopped, and a game value giving means (for example, medal payout) that grants game value according to the stop mode of the plurality of reels stopped by the stop control means. ) And a game control means (for example, game start state processing and game state update processing) that can control the progress of the game and change the ease of acquiring the game value. The game control means is one game from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and a second gaming state (for example, an advantageous section) different from the first gaming state. The state can be set, and the first game state is terminated and the second game state is set based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied while the first game state is set. Is possible, and is set after the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the operation result of the stop button of the player in the first gaming state (for example, the timing when the player presses the left reel 110). It is a means that can change the ease of acquiring the game value (for example, the ease of adding the number of AT games) in the second gaming state, and the player presses the stop button in the first gaming state. It is easier to obtain the player's profit when the second operation according to the second operation condition is performed than the first operation according to the first operation condition, and the game control means is the first operation. When the second operation is performed more than the first operation in the gaming state of the above, the predetermined condition is satisfied as compared with the case where the first operation is performed more than the second operation. The game table may be characterized in that the ease of acquiring the game value in the second game state set after being filled may be changed disadvantageously for the player.

According to such a game table, the ease of acquiring the game value in the second game state after the transition can be changed depending on the operation result of the stop button of the player in the first game state. It becomes possible to appropriately control the payout of the game value through the first game state and the second game state.

Further, the gaming table according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the "enclosed gaming machine" circulates and uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, the range of the game may be further expanded by applying the content described in one configuration to the other configurations among the plurality of configurations described in the examples.

<Other embodiments>
Hereinafter, other embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

In the game console (slot machine in this example) of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are loaded, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are subjected to a predetermined rotation start instruction operation (for example, described later). The rotation is started by accepting the operation by the start lever), and based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation (for example, the operation by the stop button described later), the winning or not of the internal winning of multiple types of roles is determined by lottery. Judgment is made, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, and the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels are stopped is determined. It is a game table that advances a series of games in which a game medium is paid out and the game is terminated if the predetermined payout conditions are met, and a game is ended without the game medium being paid out if the game medium is not met.

Next, the slot machine of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 42. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 36 to 42 are used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals are shown in the description of the present embodiment. Priority is given to the reference numerals 36 to 42.

Moreover, each embodiment of this embodiment and each embodiment of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other. In particular, another embodiment in which the same winning combination as the winning combination shown in FIG. 37 (for example, a normal push order bell and a privilege push order bell) is applied and an operation navigation suggesting the push order of the winning combination is executed, and this book. Further effects may be obtained by combining the embodiments of the embodiments.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which multiple types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit of this optical sensor is provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114.

For example, the notification lamp 123 informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in the winning combination internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp to inform you. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment is lit until the bonus game is completed after the bonus notification of notifying the confirmation of the bonus. The notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button capable of starting a certain effect when an operation is accepted. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a production button.

The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. .. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation may be referred to as a third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 as a stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is called "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can grasp that the high navigation state is in the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is in front of the slot machine 100 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding a stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

It should be noted that the device may be configured to be capable of displaying various production images and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 are designed to notify predetermined information by causing the lamps to emit light, but the notification mode is not limited to the light emission of the lamp. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a slot machine having a full liquid crystal display, an area near reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when it is described as lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190, it is intended to include notification by another effect device (for example, a display device or the like) having the same function.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine will be described. The control unit of the slot machine can be roughly divided into a main control unit that controls the progress of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit to control the main effects. It is composed of a first sub-control unit to be performed and a second sub-control unit that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit.

The main control unit includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit, and enables communication with the first sub control unit. Information communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit is one-way communication, and the main control unit can send commands and other signals to the first sub control unit, but the first sub control unit controls the main control. Cannot send signals such as commands to the unit.

The first sub-control unit includes a basic circuit that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit based on the control command. The first sub-control unit controls sound output means (speaker, sound source IC, etc.), various lamps, and the like.

The second sub-control unit includes a basic circuit that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit based on the control command. The second sub-control unit controls the liquid crystal display device and the like.

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be described.

The symbol displayed on the upper row of the left reel is the symbol on the upper row of the left reel, the symbol displayed on the middle row of the left reel is the symbol on the middle row of the left reel, the symbol displayed on the lower row of the left reel is the symbol on the lower row of the left reel, and the symbol on the upper row of the middle reel. The displayed symbol is the middle reel upper symbol, the symbol displayed in the middle reel is the middle reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed in the lower middle reel is the middle reel lower symbol, and the symbol displayed in the right reel is the upper symbol. The design displayed on the upper part of the right reel and the middle part of the right reel is called the middle part of the right reel, and the design displayed on the lower part of the right reel is called the lower part of the right reel. A total of nine are displayed on each reel, three in the vertical direction.

In the present embodiment, one winning line of the middle-stage winning line composed of the left reel middle-stage symbol, the middle-reel middle-stage symbol, and the right-reel middle-stage symbol is provided. The winning line is a line set at the stop position of the symbol that can be visually recognized through the symbol display window, and is a line for determining whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed. The valid winning line (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium.

The slot machine of this embodiment can play a 3-card or 2-card bet, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 2, no winning line is valid and 3 or 2 medals are inserted. The winning line becomes valid when bet. When the winning line is activated, the game can be started by operating the start lever.

Further, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line, it is composed of a right-down winning line consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol, and a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. A total of three winning lines rising to the right may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines according to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b). It should be noted that FIG. 3A is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts (number of grants) of each winning combination, and remarks, and is shown in FIG. ) Is a diagram showing the types of the normal push order bell and the privilege push order bell, and the payout corresponding to each push order.

A plurality of types of symbols (for example, replay symbol, watermelon symbol, cherry symbol, bell symbol, etc. shown in FIG. 37 (a)) are arranged in a predetermined number of frames (for example, 20 frames) on each reel 110 to 112. ..

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special roles (special role 1, special role 2) and general roles (replaying role, small role 1 to small role 4, normal push order bell, privilege push order bell), etc. There is. The types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are roles for shifting to a special gaming state in which a predetermined benefit is given to the player. In addition, the replaying role is a role that enables replaying without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations may be referred to as "acting combinations". Further, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of the medal (without the payout of the medal) is displayed on the valid line, for example, the special combination 1, Includes winnings for special role 2 and replaying role.

The special role 1 and the special role 2 are a combination (actuating role) that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a prize. In this example, the special role 1 is a role that can be won only in the three-card betting game, and the special role 2 is a role that can be won only in the two-card betting game. No medals will be paid out due to winning the role itself. As for the corresponding symbol combination, for example, the special role 1 (BB1) is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2", and the special role 2 (BB2) is "BAR-BAR-Seven 1".

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 1, the main control unit shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 1 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 2, the main control unit shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3).

This flag remains on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game that is internally won in the special role 1 or the special role 2, the special role is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special). If the role 1 is internally won, the "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)" symbol combination) will be in a state where it is easy to win. The special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2. Further, in this special gaming state, when a predetermined number of cards (in this example, 110 cards are won by BB1 and 55 cards are won by BB2) are paid out, a re-game low probability state (hereinafter, this state is referred to as RT1). There is).

The "re-gaming role" is a winning role (acting role) that allows a game to be played without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize, and the medal is not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay".

"Small role (small role 1 to small role 4)" is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combination is "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for small role 1 (watermelon). The role 2 (cherry) is as shown in FIG. 37 (a), such as “cherry-ANY-ANY”. The corresponding payout number is also as shown in the figure.

In addition, small role 1 (watermelon) and small role 2 (cherry) are roles that can be won by operating the correct answer timing, and in the case of "cherry-ANY-ANY", the design of the left reel 110 is "cherry". It is sufficient, and the symbols of the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 indicate that any symbol may be used. In addition, although the details will be described later, the small role 3 and the small role 4 are the roles that can be won by the operation of the correct answer pressing order. In some cases.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. For reel stop control, one of a plurality of types of reel stop control data determined in advance is selected based on a predetermined condition (result of the internal lottery process of the winning combination), and based on the selected reel stop control data. conduct.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slip control) is performed. The pull-in control is to shift the stop position of the reels 110 to 112 within a certain number of frames (number of symbols) range (pull-in range; here, maximum 4 frames) after each stop button 137 to 139 is operated by the player. Refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM of the main control unit. Each reel stop data has a permissible control that allows a predetermined combination of winning combinations to be displayed together on the winning line, and a prohibition control that does not display all the symbol combinations of any winning combination on the winning line. It is roughly divided into.

Examples of allowable control are, for example, when an internal winning combination is internally won or when a special winning combination is being internally won (the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is bad, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are displayed together within the range of the above number of frames. However, since it is only "allowed", the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each stop button 137 to 139.

For example, when the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is internally won, the watermelon symbol is arranged over 4 frames, so if the timing to operate the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon symbol will be on the winning line. Do not stop.

However, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of frames drawn in, 100% may be aligned. For example, since the arrangement interval of the replay symbols corresponding to the replay combination is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination is internally elected, 100% of the prizes will be won regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, as an example in which the prohibition control is performed, for example, the internal lottery result is lost and the special role is not being internally elected (the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is good, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are not displayed together within the range of the above number of frames.

<Pushing order bell>
Next, the normal push order bell and the privilege push order bell will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 37 (b).

<Normal push order bell>
If any of the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" is internally won, multiple small wins (in this example, small wins 3 and small wins 4) are won in duplicate, depending on the player's operation order. The symbol combination displayed on the winning line is determined. In addition, regardless of the set value of any of the settings 1 to 6, it is possible to internally win the "normal push order bells 1 to 6".

As shown in FIG. 37 (b), each of the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" has six types of "LCR", "LRC", "CLR", "CRL", "RLC", and "RCL". It is subdivided into the pressing order (operation order) of, and in this example, 12 small winning combinations (small winning combination 3) are assigned to one of the six types of pressing order. The range of lottery data associated with each of the six types of push order is the same.

For example, when the "normal push order bell 1 LCR" of the "normal push order bell 1" is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right. The stop operation on the reel 112 is the correct answer operation (correct answer pressing order), and the other stop operations are incorrect answer operations (incorrect answer pressing order). If the "normal push order bell 4CRL" is internally won among the "normal push order bells 4", the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left. The stop operation on the reel 110 is the correct answer operation (correct answer pressing order), and the other stop operations are incorrect answer operations (incorrect answer pressing order).

When the stop operation (correct answer pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order to win the 12-card small role (small role 3), the "bell-" corresponding to the small role 3 "Bell-Bell" will be displayed on the winning line and 12 medals will be paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect release order operation) that does not follow the 12-card acquisition navigation is performed, the "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to one small role (small role 4) wins a prize. If it is displayed on the line and one medal is paid out, or if the small winning combination 4 is missed (if the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line), the medal is paid out. It will not be removed (it will be lost).

In addition, when the stop operation (correct answer pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring one card) that suggests the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4), the "small winning combination 4" corresponds to ". "Bell-Bell-Replay" is displayed on the winning line, and if one medal is paid out or the small winning combination 4 is missed (the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line). In some cases), the medal will not be paid out (it will be lost).

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect release order operation) that does not follow the one-card acquisition navigation is performed, the "bell-bell-bell" corresponding to the small winning combination 3 will be on the winning line depending on the operation order. 12 medals are paid out, or "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to the small role 4 is displayed on the winning line, and 1 medal is paid out, or the small role 4 is missed. (If the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line), the medal will not be paid out (it will be lost).

In the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" of this example, since 12 small wins (small wins 3) are assigned to one of the six types of push orders, "normal push order bells 1 to 6" If you win an internal prize in any of the above, there is a 1/6 chance that 12 medals will be paid out. The winning probability of the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not limited to this example, and may be larger than 1/6.

<Bonus push order bell>
If any of the "Bonus Push Order Bells 1 to 6" is internally won, multiple small wins (in this example, small wins 3 and small wins 4) will be won in duplicate, depending on the player's operation order. The symbol combination displayed on the winning line is determined. In addition, regardless of the set value of any of the settings 1 to 6, it is possible to internally win the "privilege push order bells 1 to 6".

As shown in FIG. 37 (b), each of the "privilege push order bells 1 to 6" has six types of "LCR", "LRC", "CLR", "CRL", "RLC", and "RCL". In this example, one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) is assigned to one of the six types of pressing order, and the six types of pressing order are set. Twelve small roles (small role 3) are assigned to five of them. The range of lottery data associated with each of the six types of push order is the same.

For example, when the "privilege push order bell 1 LCR" of the "privilege push order bell 1" is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right. The stop operation on the reel 112 is the correct answer operation (correct answer pressing order), and the other stop operations are incorrect answer operations (incorrect answer pressing order). If the "Bonus Push Order Bell 4 CRL" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left. The stop operation on the reel 110 is the correct answer operation (correct answer pressing order), and the other stop operations are incorrect answer operations (incorrect answer pressing order).

When the stop operation (correct answer pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring one card) that suggests the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4), the "bell-" corresponding to the small winning combination 4 "Bell-Replay" is displayed on the winning line and one medal is paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect release order operation) that does not follow the 1-card acquisition navigation is performed, the "Bell-Bell-Bell" corresponding to the 12-card small role (small role 3) will win a prize. Displayed on the line.

In addition, when the stop operation (correct answer pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order for winning the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3), the "small winning combination 3" corresponds to ". "Bell-Bell-Bell" will be displayed on the winning line and 12 medals will be paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect release order operation) that does not follow the 12-card acquisition navigation is performed, "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is displayed on the winning line. One medal will be paid out.

In the "privilege push order bells 1 to 6" of this example, 12 small wins (small win 3) are assigned to 5 of the 6 types of push orders, so "privilege push order bells 1 to 6". If you win an internal prize in any of the above, there is a 5/6 chance that 12 medals will be paid out. The winning probability of the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not limited to this example, and may be larger or smaller than 5/6.

<Type of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of the gaming state of the slot machine will be described.

The main control unit of the slot machine is roughly divided into a replay low probability state (RT1), a special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) in the replay high probability state, and a special role 2 internal winning state in the replay high probability state (RT2). It has RT3) and a special gaming state (RT4). In the present embodiment, the gaming states roughly divided into these four are referred to as RT-based gaming states. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit also controls the state related to the so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as the AT system gaming state), and the first control unit determines the AT system gaming state. The sub-control unit is designed to set the gaming state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 38 (A).

The re-game low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operation of the condition device related to the re-game combination does not change (default state), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state. (RT3) and the special gaming state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of operation of the conditional device related to the replaying combination varies from the default state.

Hereinafter, the game state of the RT system of the slot machine will be described.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The re-game low probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-game is the lowest among other game states (for example, a game state excluding a special game state) (disadvantageous to the player), and is referred to as a normal game state. There is also.

If the special role 1 is internally won, the system shifts to the special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) described later, and if the special role 2 is internally won, the system shifts to the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) described later. do.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "special role internal winning state") are the replay low probability state (RT1). ), The internal winning probability of the re-game combination is higher than that of), and the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and the player stops the operation at a predetermined timing. By doing so, it is possible to display the symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag.

In the special role internal winning state, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is displayed, the state shifts to the special game state (RT4) described later.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the most advantageous gaming state among all the gaming states.

In the special game state (RT4), when the specified number of cards is paid out, the game shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1). Specifically, in the case of shifting to the special gaming state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1, if more than 110 medals are paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) Move to. In addition, when the special gaming state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, when more than 55 medals are paid out, the re-gaming low probability state (RT1) is entered. ..

<Transition of AT-based game state>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be described.

The AT-type game state is roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is higher than that in the low navigation state, and is also referred to as an AT mode.

Here, the operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the correct operation order when the push order is internally won. That is, the operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the content of the stop operation for acquiring a medal, the content of the stop operation for shifting to an advantageous gaming state or maintaining an advantageous gaming state. In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed by using the payout number display and the effect image display device.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is higher than that in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. When the stop operation is performed according to the operation content of the operation navigation, a favorable result is brought to the player, so that the high navigation state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, the advantage is specifically the total number of game media paid out by the game console with respect to the total number of game media used by the player as a bet number when playing a game for a predetermined period. The ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball payout rate).

In the present embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when a winning combination other than loss is won), the game shifts to the normal state (normal game state) in the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 38 (A), for example, the state shifts to the AT1 state, the AT1 state of the first lap is repeated for a plurality of sets (for example, 2 sets or 10 sets), and then the normal state (normal game state). Via a route that shifts to the AT1 state, a route that shifts to the AT1 state (returns) to the AT1 state on the second lap after repeating multiple sets (for example, 10 sets) of the AT1 state, and then shifts to the AT2 state (ending state), or via the pullback state. Then, there is a route or the like that shifts to the normal gaming state or the AT2 state.

In the present embodiment, when the transition of the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is determined, a predetermined number (for example, 50 games or the like) is given to the number of games in the AT mode (hereinafter referred to as the number of AT games). Further, when a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
Each game state of the AT system is further subdivided and managed, and this is called a production state. Specifically, the low navigation state effect state has a normal state, and the high navigation state effect state has a normal state, a confirmed notification state, a judge state, a pullback state, an AT1 state, an AT2 state, and an LMT (limit) state. .. In addition, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of balls to be ejected increases.

Here, the limit state means, in principle, the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, that is, the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state). It is possible that the production state of is not the limit state). In the present embodiment, when the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, an ending effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “ED effect”) suggesting the end of the high navigation state is executed.

<Direction table>
Next, the effect table provided in the first sub-control unit will be described.
@
@
The effect table provided for each effect state is stored in the storage means (for example, ROM) of the first sub-control unit. The first sub control unit acquires the effect information (for example, effect state, high navigation state counter, effect state counter, etc.) included in the command received from the main control unit, and refers to the effect table corresponding to the effect state and the like. , The production is performed according to the production status counter and the like. For example, when the current effect state is the AT1 state, the effect table corresponding to the AT1 state (AT1 state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the AT1 effect from the ROM is performed. When it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

Further, when the current effect state is the judge state, the effect table corresponding to the judge state (judgment state effect table) is referred to, and the effect data for executing the judge effect is read from the ROM and the like is performed. When it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (1) / Overview>
The game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) has a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, and an internal winning combination. A lottery means that can derive the lottery result by drawing a lottery (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout). Processing) and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege pushing order bell 6 shown in FIG. 37B), when the operation in the first operation mode (for example, the reverse pushing operation) is performed, a plurality of operations are performed. The reel is stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), and the second operation is performed when the lottery result is the first lottery result. When the operation in the mode (for example, the forward push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line). The game value-adding means is when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) rather than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). It is configured to give more of the game value.

Further, the plurality of gaming states include a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a first specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 38 (A). ), And the second specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 38 (A)). The AT2 state (ending state) shown) is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and when the second condition is satisfied, the second condition is satisfied. The first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement (for example, when the lottery for the transition to the AT1 state is won), and the second condition includes the above-mentioned first condition. Includes fulfillment of the second requirement (for example, when the lottery for transition to the AT2 state is won), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (the plurality of reels). The advantage for satisfying the first requirement in the first stop mode (for example, AT1 transition rate 21 shown in FIG. 38 (B)) is that the plurality of stop buttons are the second. When the operation is performed in the operation mode (when the operation is not stopped in the first stop mode), the advantage for satisfying the first requirement (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 15% shown in FIG. 38 (B)). Higher than, advantageous for satisfying the second requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first mode of operation (when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first mode of stop). The degree (for example, the AT2 transition rate of 9% shown in FIG. 38 (B)) was not stopped when the plurality of stop buttons were operated in the second operation mode (for example, the AT2 transition rate was not stopped in the first stop mode). Case) is lower than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement (for example, the AT2 transition rate of 11% shown in FIG. 38 (B)).

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (1) / Specific example>
FIG. 38B is a diagram showing a specific example of advantageous section control (1) when the operation navigation is ignored.

In the state shown in FIGS. 38 (B) and 38 (1), in the normal state, for example, the privilege push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode). It is in the state where the operation navigation that prompts is executed.

The AT1 transition rate in the same state (probability of winning to shift to the AT1 state by the transition lottery. Advantage for satisfying the first requirement) is 20%, and the AT2 transition rate in the same state (winning to shift to the AT2 state by the transition lottery). Probability. Advantage over fulfillment of the second requirement) is 10%.

Subsequent states shown in FIGS. 38 (B) and 38 (2) are states in which the player performs a stop operation according to an operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, the "bell-bell-replay" symbol on the winning line. The combination is complete), and one medal is paid out.

Further, in the same state, since a plurality of reels stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), the AT1 transition rate (first). (Advantage for satisfying the requirements) increased from 20% to 21% (advantage increased), and AT2 transition rate (advantage for satisfying the second requirement) decreased from 10% to 9% (advantage). 1 point is given and the total number of point pt is increased from 20 to 21.

On the other hand, the state shown in FIGS. 38 (B) and 38 (3) does not follow the operation navigation for prompting the player to perform the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), for example, the forward push operation (in the second operation mode). It is in the state where the stop operation is performed in (operation).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (in this example, the "bell" on the winning line. -The mode in which the symbol combinations of "Bell-Bell" are aligned) will be stopped, and 12 medals will be paid out.

Further, in the same state, a plurality of reels stopped in the second stop mode (a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line) (not stopped in the first stop mode). Therefore, the AT1 transition rate (advantage for satisfying the first requirement) decreases from 20% to 15% (advantage becomes lower), and the AT2 transition rate (advantage for satisfying the second requirement) is 10%. Has risen to 11% (higher advantage) and no points have been awarded.

That is, in this example, when the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (when the operation navigation is ignored), the AT1 transition rate decreases and it becomes difficult to shift to the AT1 state, but the AT2 transition rate increases. However, it becomes easier to shift to the AT2 state.

If the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is disadvantageous even for the second specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state) in which it is not known whether or not the transition is made after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state). However, according to this example, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the second specific advantageous gaming state is to be more advantageous than the case of following the operation navigation. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be maintained until the player's operation error or the like is relieved and the player shifts to the second specific advantageous gaming state.

As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) is a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states. And, a lottery means for drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of a winning combination and deriving the lottery result (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery), and a game value giving means for giving a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels. (For example, medal payout processing) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 36) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ), And the lottery result includes the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 37 (b)), and the lottery result is the first. In the case of the lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation), the plurality of reels are placed in the first stop mode (for example, "bell" on the winning line. -A mode in which the symbol combinations of "Bell-Replay" are aligned), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (for example, a forward push operation), the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode. (For example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line), and the game value-giving means is the plurality of reels when the lottery result is the first lottery result. Is stopped in the second stopping mode (for example, paying out 12 cards) more than the case where the game is stopped in the first stopping mode (for example, paying out one card). The plurality of gaming states include a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 38) that can be transferred after the normal advantageous gaming state. The AT1 state shown in (A) and the judge state relating to whether or not to shift to the AT state) and the second specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 38 (A). ) Is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and when the second condition is satisfied, the above It is configured to be able to shift to the second specific advantageous gaming state, and the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement (for example, when the lottery to shift to the AT1 state is won), and the second The conditions include the fulfillment of the second requirement (for example, if the lottery for transition to the AT2 state is won). In the case of a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a state in which the AT transition such as the 1G after the transition to the advantageous section is not determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stops. When the button is operated in the first operation mode, the advantage for satisfying the first requirement (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 21% shown in FIG. 38 (B)) is obtained by the plurality of stop buttons. The plurality of stop buttons are higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 15% shown in FIG. 38 (B)) when the operation is performed in the second operation mode. When the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the advantage for satisfying the second requirement (for example, the AT2 transition rate of 9% shown in FIG. 38B) is such that the plurality of stop buttons are the first. A game table characterized in that it is lower than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement (for example, the AT2 transition rate of 11% shown in FIG. 38 (B)) when the operation is performed in the second operation mode. Is.

If the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is disadvantageous even for the second specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state) in which it is not known whether or not the transition is made after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state). However, according to the game console according to the present embodiment, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the second specific advantageous gaming state is compared with the case where the operation navigation is followed. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be maintained until the player's operation error or the like is relieved and the player shifts to the second specific advantageous gaming state.

The "satisfaction of the second requirement" is not limited to the case where the lottery for transition to the AT2 state is won, for example, when the number of acquired game media reaches a certain number (for example, 1840). Included (as well as other embodiments).

Further, a notification means capable of performing notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation) is configured to be executable, and the notification means operates in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation that prompts the user (for example, the operation navigation that prompts the forward push operation) may be configured to be executable.

Further, one game is provided with a certain counter (for example, the ceiling residual counter shown in FIG. 39 (A) and the second counter shown in FIGS. 41 (C) and 41 (D)) relating to the satisfaction of the first requirement. The count value of the certain counter may be updated every time the event is performed, and the notification means may be able to start a count display indicating the count value.

Further, when 0 is displayed as the count display after the power is cut off and the power is restored, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode after the power is cut off, the numerical value indicated by the count display is used. The count values may match, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode after the power is cut off and restored, the numerical value indicated by the count display and the count value match. It may be the one that does not have a case.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the satisfaction level of the player who performed the operation according to the operation navigation, and it is possible to call attention to the player who did not perform the operation according to the operation navigation.

Further, the plurality of gaming states include a normal state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is more advantageous for displaying the operation navigation than the normal state, and the advantageous state includes the advantageous state. , The first specific advantageous gaming state and the second specific advantageous gaming state are included, and in the advantageous state, there is a case where the transition to the second specific advantageous gaming state does not occur after the first specific advantageous gaming state. There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the game and increase the satisfaction of the player.

Further, the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed by being configured to be able to execute the second operation navigation in the first specific advantageous gaming state. May not be lower than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the satisfaction level of the player who has performed the operation according to the operation navigation.

Further, even when the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed, the plurality of reels may be stopped in the second stop mode.

With such a configuration, even when the operation navigation is ignored, a profit can be given to the player, and the satisfaction level of the player can be enhanced.

Further, when the second operation navigation is executed, either the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed or the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed. Even so, the effect corresponding to the operation can be executed, and when the first operation navigation is executed, the operation is performed only when the first operation according to the first operation navigation is performed. It may be feasible to produce an effect according to the operation.

With such a configuration, the difference between the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed and the case where the operation according to the first operation navigation is performed can be easily understood by the difference in the production. In addition to being able to do this, the effect of the production can be enhanced by making the production different.

Further, the game value-adding means is configured so as not to add the game value when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. It may have been done.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment includes a control means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, a lottery means capable of drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of a winning combination, and a lottery means capable of deriving the lottery result. A game value-imparting means for imparting game value according to the stopping mode of the reels, and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. The game table is provided, and the lottery result includes the first lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode. When the operation is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode. In the case where the lottery result is the first lottery result, the game value-imparting means is better when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. The plurality of gaming states are configured to impart a large number of the gaming values, the normal advantageous gaming state, the first specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the normal advantageous gaming state, and the first specific advantageous gaming state. A second specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the specific advantageous gaming state is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, the configuration is such that the transition to the first specific advantageous gaming state is possible, and the second condition is When it is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the second specific advantageous gaming state, the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement, and the second condition includes the second requirement. The first when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The advantage for satisfying the requirement is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop. The advantage for satisfying the second requirement when stopped in the second stop mode is lower than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode. , It may be a game table characterized by that.

Further, the game table according to the present embodiment is a control means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, and a game value adding means for adding game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels. , Set one of a plurality of game value-added states in relation to the game value-giving status (for example, base (so-called machine discount), push order bell acquisition status, navigation compliance rate, etc.). A game table provided with a possible game value-adding state control means, wherein the plurality of game states include a normal advantageous game state and a first specific advantageous game state that can be transferred after the normal advantageous game state. A second specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the first specific advantageous gaming state is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, the first specific advantageous gaming state can be transitioned to. , When the second condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the second specific advantageous gaming state, and the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement, and the second condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement. Includes the fulfillment of the second requirement, and the plurality of game value-giving states are set in at least the normal advantageous game state, that is, the first game value-giving state (for example, the state where the base is 60%). And a second game value giving state (for example, a state where the base is 80% m) are included, and the game value giving state control means has a certain situation in which the game value is given (hereinafter, "first situation"). In the case of (), the first game value granting state can be set, and the game value granting situation is different from the first situation (hereinafter referred to as "second situation"). In the case of.), The second game value granting state can be set, and the second situation is more advantageous to the player with respect to the game value granting situation than the first situation. , When the first game value granting state is set in a certain state in the normal advantageous game state (for example, a state in which the number of acquired cards (MY) is 0 in the 300Gth state of the normal advantageous game state). The advantage over the satisfaction of the first requirement is higher than the advantage over the satisfaction of the first requirement when the second game value-giving state is set, and the first game value-giving state is set. The advantage for satisfying the second requirement when is set is lower than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the second game value granting state is set. It may be a game table characterized by.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (2) / Overview>
The game console described with reference to FIG. 38B is a second when a plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (when a plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode). The advantage for satisfying the requirement is the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when a plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (when not stopped in the first stop mode). Although it was lower than the degree, in the game console according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of stop buttons were operated in the first operation mode (a plurality of reels were stopped in the first stop mode). The advantage for satisfying the second requirement in the case) is the second when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (when not stopped in the first stop mode). It is the same as the advantage for satisfying the requirements.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (2) / Specific example>
FIG. 38C is a diagram showing a specific example of advantageous section control (2) when the operation navigation is ignored.

In the state shown in FIGS. 38 (C) and 38 (1), in the normal state, for example, the privilege push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode). It is in the state where the operation navigation that prompts is executed.

The AT1 transition rate in the same state (probability of winning to shift to the AT1 state by the transition lottery. Advantage for satisfying the first requirement) is 20%, and the AT2 transition rate in the same state (winning to shift to the AT2 state by the transition lottery). Probability. Advantage over fulfillment of the second requirement) is 10%.

The following states shown in FIGS. 38 (C) and 38 (2) are states in which the player performs a stop operation according to an operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, the "bell-bell-replay" symbol on the winning line. The combination is complete), and one medal is paid out.

Further, in the same state, since a plurality of reels stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), the AT1 transition rate (first). (Advantage for fulfillment of requirements) increased from 20% to 21% (advantage increased), AT2 transition rate (advantage for fulfillment of second requirement) was maintained at 10% (advantage changed) (Not), 1 point is given and the total number of point pt is increased from 20 to 21.

On the other hand, the state shown in FIGS. 38 (C) and 38 (3) does not follow the operation navigation for prompting the player to perform the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), for example, the forward push operation (in the second operation mode). It is in the state where the stop operation is performed in (operation).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (in this example, the "bell" on the winning line. -The mode in which the symbol combinations of "Bell-Bell" are aligned) will be stopped, and 12 medals will be paid out.

Further, in the same state, a plurality of reels stopped in the second stop mode (a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line) (not stopped in the first stop mode). Therefore, the AT1 transition rate (advantage for satisfying the first requirement) decreases from 20% to 15% (advantage becomes lower), and the AT2 transition rate (advantage for satisfying the second requirement) is 10%. (Advantage does not change) and no points are awarded.

That is, in this example, when the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (when the operation navigation is ignored), the AT1 transition rate decreases and it becomes difficult to shift to the AT1 state, but the AT2 transition rate changes. do not do.

If the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is disadvantageous even for the second specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state) in which it is not known whether or not the transition is made after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state). However, according to this example, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the second specific advantageous gaming state has a difference in advantage from the case of following the operation navigation. Since it is not provided, the player's willingness to play can be maintained until the player shifts to the second specific advantageous gaming state while relieving the player's operation error or the like.

As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) is a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states. And, a lottery means for drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of a winning combination and deriving the lottery result (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery), and a game value giving means for giving a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels. (For example, medal payout processing) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 36) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ), And the lottery result includes the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 37 (b)), and the lottery result is the first. In the case of the lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation), the plurality of reels are placed in the first stop mode (for example, "bell" on the winning line. -A mode in which the symbol combinations of "Bell-Replay" are aligned), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (for example, a forward push operation), the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode. (For example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line), and the game value-giving means is the plurality of reels when the lottery result is the first lottery result. Is stopped in the second stopping mode (for example, paying out 12 cards) more than the case where the game is stopped in the first stopping mode (for example, paying out one card). The plurality of gaming states include a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 38) that can be transferred after the normal advantageous gaming state. The AT1 state shown in (A) and the judge state relating to whether or not to shift to the AT state) and the second specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 38 (A). ) Is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first advantageous gaming state, and when the second condition is satisfied, the first condition is satisfied. It is configured to be able to shift to the second advantageous gaming state, and the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement (for example, when the lottery to shift to the AT1 state is won), and the second condition includes. Includes the fulfillment of the second requirement (for example, if you win the lottery to transition to AT2 state), Note: In a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a state in which the AT transition such as the 1G after the transition to the advantageous section is not determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are pressed. When the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the advantage for satisfying the first requirement (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 21% shown in FIG. 38C) is such that the plurality of stop buttons are the first. The plurality of stop buttons are higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 15% shown in FIG. 38 (C)) when the operation is performed in the second operation mode. When the operation is performed in one operation mode, the advantage for satisfying the second requirement (for example, the AT2 transition rate of 10% shown in FIG. 38C) is such that the plurality of stop buttons are the second. It is a game table characterized in that it is the same as the advantage for satisfying the second requirement (for example, the AT2 transition rate of 10% shown in FIG. 38 (C)) when the operation is performed in the operation mode. ..

If the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is disadvantageous even for the second specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state) in which it is not known whether or not the transition is made after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state). However, according to the game console according to the present embodiment, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the second specific advantageous gaming state is the case where the operation navigation is followed. Since there is no difference in the degree of advantage, the player's willingness to play can be maintained until the player shifts to the second specific advantageous gaming state while relieving the player's operation error or the like.

Further, in the case where the lottery result is the first lottery result in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state, the first operation in the case where the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode. Even if the advantage in the specific advantageous gaming state is higher than the advantage in the first specific advantageous gaming state when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. good.

Further, a notification means capable of performing notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation) is configured to be executable, and the notification means operates in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation that prompts the user (for example, the operation navigation that prompts the forward push operation) may be configured to be executable.

Further, one game is provided with a certain counter (for example, the ceiling residual counter shown in FIG. 39 (A) and the second counter shown in FIGS. 41 (C) and 41 (D)) relating to the satisfaction of the first requirement. The count value of the certain counter may be updated every time the event is performed, and the notification means may be able to start a count display indicating the count value.

Further, when 0 is displayed as the count display after the power is cut off and the power is restored, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode after the power is cut off, the numerical value indicated by the count display is used. The count values may match, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode after the power is cut off and restored, the numerical value indicated by the count display and the count value match. It may be the one that does not have a case.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the satisfaction level of the player who performed the operation according to the operation navigation, and it is possible to call attention to the player who did not perform the operation according to the operation navigation.

Further, the plurality of gaming states include a normal state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is more advantageous for displaying the operation navigation than the normal state, and the advantageous state includes the advantageous state. , The first specific advantageous gaming state and the second specific advantageous gaming state are included, and in the advantageous state, there is a case where the transition to the second specific advantageous gaming state does not occur after the first specific advantageous gaming state. There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the game and increase the satisfaction of the player.

Further, the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed by being configured to be able to execute the second operation navigation in the first specific advantageous gaming state. May not be lower than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the satisfaction level of the player who has performed the operation according to the operation navigation.

Further, even when the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed, the plurality of reels may be stopped in the second stop mode.

With such a configuration, even when the operation navigation is ignored, a profit can be given to the player, and the satisfaction level of the player can be enhanced.

Further, when the second operation navigation is executed, either the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed or the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed. Even so, the effect corresponding to the operation can be executed, and when the first operation navigation is executed, the operation is performed only when the first operation according to the first operation navigation is performed. It may be feasible to produce an effect according to the operation.

With such a configuration, the difference between the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed and the case where the operation according to the first operation navigation is performed can be easily understood by the difference in the production. In addition to being able to do this, the effect of the production can be enhanced by making the production different.

Further, the game value-adding means is configured so as not to add the game value when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. It may have been done.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment includes a control means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, a lottery means capable of drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of a winning combination, and a lottery means capable of deriving the lottery result. A game value-imparting means for imparting game value according to the stopping mode of the reels, and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. The game table is provided, and the lottery result includes the first lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode. When the operation is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode. In the case where the lottery result is the first lottery result, the game value-imparting means is better when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. The plurality of gaming states are configured to impart a large number of the gaming values, the normal advantageous gaming state, the first specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the normal advantageous gaming state, and the first specific advantageous gaming state. A second specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the specific advantageous gaming state is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, the configuration is such that the transition to the first specific advantageous gaming state is possible, and the second condition is When it is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the second specific advantageous gaming state, the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement, and the second condition includes the second requirement. The first when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The advantage for satisfying the requirement is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop. The advantage for satisfying the second requirement when stopped in the second stop mode is the same as the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode. , It may be a game table characterized by that.

Further, the game table according to the present embodiment is a control means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, and a game value adding means for adding game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels. A game table provided with a game value-giving state control means capable of setting one of a plurality of game value-giving states in relation to the game value-giving status, wherein the plurality of game states are provided. Includes a normal advantageous gaming state, a first specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the normal advantageous gaming state, and a second specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the first specific advantageous gaming state. When the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and when the second condition is met, it is configured to be able to shift to the second specific advantageous gaming state. The first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement, the second condition includes the satisfaction of the second requirement, and the plurality of game value-added states include at least the above. The first game value-giving state and the second game value-giving state, which are usually set in the advantageous game state, are included, and the game value-giving state control means has a certain game value-giving status (hereinafter, referred to as a situation). In the case of "first situation"), the first game value giving state can be set, and the game value giving situation is different from the first situation (hereinafter, "first situation"). In the case of "two situations"), the second game value granting state can be set, and the second situation is more for the player than the first situation with respect to the game value granting situation. It is an advantageous situation, and in a certain state in the normal advantageous game state, the advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the first game value granting state is set is the second game value. It is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the granted state is set, and the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the first game value granting state is set. The game table may be characterized in that it has the same advantage as the satisfaction of the second requirement when the second game value-adding state is set.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (3) / Overview>
The game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) has a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, and an internal winning combination. A lottery means that can derive the lottery result by drawing a lottery (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout). Processing) and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege pushing order bell 6 shown in FIG. 37B), when the operation in the first operation mode (for example, the reverse pushing operation) is performed, a plurality of operations are performed. The reel is stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), and the second operation is performed when the lottery result is the first lottery result. When the operation in the mode (for example, the forward push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line). The game value-adding means is when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) rather than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). It is configured to give more of the game value.

Further, the plurality of gaming states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 38 (A)) and an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 38 (A)) which is more advantageous for the display of the operation navigation than the normal state. The AT1 state and AT2 state shown) are included, and a first counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation counter and the advantageous section counter shown in FIG. 39 (A)) is provided, and one game is performed in the advantageous state. The count value (first count value) of the first counter can be updated for each time, and the second counter for a certain profit grant (for example, the ceiling balance counter shown in FIG. 39 (A)). The count value (second count value) of the second counter can be updated every time one game is played in the advantageous state, and the advantageous state and the lottery result are the first. In the case of the lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode), the first When the count values of both the count value and the second count value are updatable and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (the plurality of reels are the first). In the case of not being stopped in the stop mode), only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (3) / Specific example>
FIG. 39A is a diagram showing a specific example of advantageous section control (3) when the operation navigation is ignored.

In the state shown in FIGS. 39 (C) and 39 (1), in the normal state, for example, the privilege push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode). It is in the state where the operation navigation that prompts is executed.

The count value (first count value) of the high navigation counter (first counter) in the same state is 900, and the count value (second count value) of the ceiling residual counter (second counter) in the same state is 900. It is 550. Here, the ceiling remaining counter is a counter indicating the number of games remaining until the so-called ceiling is reached.

The following states shown in FIGS. 39 (A) and 39 (2) are states in which the player performs a stop operation according to an operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, the "bell-bell-replay" symbol on the winning line. The combination is complete), and one medal is paid out.

Further, in the same state, since a plurality of reels stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), the high navigation counter (first). The count value (first count value) of the ceiling residual counter (second counter) is subtracted by one and updated to 899, and the count value (second count value) of the ceiling balance counter (second counter) is subtracted by one to 549. It has been updated to.

On the other hand, the state shown in FIGS. 39 (A) and 39 (3) does not follow the operation navigation for prompting the player to perform the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), for example, the forward push operation (in the second operation mode). It is in the state where the stop operation is performed in (operation).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (in this example, the "bell" on the winning line. -The mode in which the symbol combinations of "Bell-Bell" are aligned) will be stopped, and 12 medals will be paid out.

Further, in the same state, a plurality of reels stopped in the second stop mode (a mode in which the "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line) (they were not stopped in the first stop mode). From, the count value (first count value) of the high navigation counter (first counter) is subtracted by one and updated to 899, but the count value (second count) of the ceiling balance counter (second counter) is updated. Value) has not been updated.

That is, in this example, when the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (when the operation navigation is ignored), the count value (first count value) of the high navigation counter (first counter) is updated. However, the count value (second count value) of the ceiling remaining counter (second counter) is not updated.

It is terrible to put the player at a disadvantage if the player does not follow the operation navigation, but according to this example, the second count value (for example, the ceiling) only when the player follows the operation navigation. Even if the player does not follow the operation navigation while the counter) can be updated, the first count value (for example, the advantageous section counter) is updated in the same manner as when the player follows the operation navigation. Therefore, fairness can be ensured regarding the operation of the player, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play due to an operation error or the like.

As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) is a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states. And, a lottery means for drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of the winning combination and deriving the lottery result (for example, processing of the winning winning combination internal lottery), and a game value giving means for giving the game value according to the stopping mode of a plurality of reels. (For example, a medal payout process) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 36) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ), And the lottery result includes the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 37 (b)), and the lottery result is the first. In the case of the lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, a reverse push operation), the plurality of reels are placed in the first stop mode (for example, a "bell" on the winning line. -A mode in which the symbol combinations of "Bell-Replay" are aligned), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (for example, a forward push operation), the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode. (For example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line), and the game value-giving means is the plurality of reels when the lottery result is the first lottery result. Is stopped in the second stopping mode (for example, paying out 12 cards) more than the case where the game is stopped in the first stopping mode (for example, paying out one card). The plurality of gaming states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 38 (A)) and an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 38 (A)) which is more advantageous for executing the operation navigation than the normal state. ) Is included (AT1 state, AT2 state), and a first counter related to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation counter shown in FIG. 39 (A) or an advantageous section counter) is provided, and one game is played in the advantageous state. The count value of the first counter (hereinafter, referred to as “first count value”) can be updated each time it is performed, and the second counter for a certain profit grant (for example, FIG. 39 (for example)). The ceiling remaining counter) shown in A) is provided, and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated every time one game is played in the advantageous state. The advantageous state and the lottery result are the first In the case of one lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode in the advantageous state, both the first count value and the second count value are performed. When the count value is updatable and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode in the advantageous state, the first count value and the second count value are selected. It is a game table characterized in that only the first count value can be updated.

It is terrible to put the player at a disadvantage when the player does not follow the operation navigation, but according to the game counter according to the present embodiment, the second is only when the player follows the operation navigation. Even if the count value (for example, the ceiling counter) can be updated, but the player does not follow the operation navigation, the first count value (for example, an advantageous section) is the same as when the player follows the operation navigation. Since the counter) is updated, fairness can be ensured regarding the operation of the player, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play due to an operation error or the like.

Further, the advantageous state shifts to the normal advantageous gaming state and the first specific advantageous gaming state that can be transitioned after the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT1 state shown in FIG. 38 (A) or the AT state. (Judge state regarding whether or not) is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and the first condition satisfies the first requirement. Is included, and in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a state in which the AT transition such as the 1Gth after the transition to the advantageous section has not been determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of The advantage over satisfying the first requirement when the stop button is operated in the first operation mode is when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. It may be higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement.

Further, a notification means capable of performing notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation) is configured to be executable, and the notification means operates in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation that prompts the user (for example, the operation navigation that prompts the forward push operation) may be configured to be executable.

Further, the advantageous state includes the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state), and when the second count value reaches the second value, the first specific advantageous gaming state. It may be configured to migrate to.

Further, when the first count value reaches the first value (for example, the ceiling value), it is configured to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and in the advantageous state, the first operation navigation When the operation according to the above is performed, the second count value is configured to reach the second value before the first count value reaches the first value. It may have been.

Further, the advantageous state includes a second specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state) that can be transferred after the first specific advantageous gaming state, and can be given in the first specific advantageous gaming state. The amount of the game value may be larger than the amount of the game value that can be imparted in the second specific advantageous gaming state.

Further, when the operation according to the first operation navigation is performed in the advantageous state, the advantageous state ends before the first count value reaches the first value. There may be cases.

Further, the count display indicating the first count value (for example, the advantageous section counter display) can be started from the middle of the advantageous state, and the count display indicating the second count value (for example, the ceiling residual counter display) can be started. ) May be displayable up to a certain point in time before the count display indicating the first count value is started.

Further, the game value-adding means is configured so as not to add the game value when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. It may have been done.

Further, the game table according to the present embodiment includes a control means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, a lottery means capable of drawing a lottery regarding internal winning of a winning combination, and a lottery means capable of deriving a lottery result. A game value-giving means for adding game value according to the stopping mode of the reels, a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and a plurality of stop buttons for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. The lottery result includes the first lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are in the first operation mode. When the operation is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode. The game value-giving means is a case where the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode rather than the case where the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. Is configured to impart a large number of the game values, and the plurality of game states include a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous for displaying the operation navigation than the normal state, and the first regarding the advantageous state. The counter is provided, and the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as “first count value”) can be updated every time one game is played in the advantageous state, and there is a certain advantage. It is provided with a second counter for granting, and is configured to be able to update the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") every time one game is played in the advantageous state. , The first count value and the second count when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode in the case of the advantageous state and the lottery result is the first lottery result. When both count values of the values are updatable and the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, the first of the first count value and the second count value. It is a game table characterized in that only the count value of is updatable.

<Ending / Overview when ignoring operation navigation>
The game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) has a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, and an internal winning combination. A lottery means that can derive the lottery result by drawing a lottery (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout). Processing) and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege pushing order bell 6 shown in FIG. 37B), when the operation in the first operation mode (for example, the reverse pushing operation) is performed, a plurality of operations are performed. The reel is stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), and the second operation is performed when the lottery result is the first lottery result. When the operation in the mode (for example, the forward push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line). The game value-adding means is when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) rather than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). It is configured to give more of the game value.

Further, the advantageous state includes a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 38 (A)) and a first type of specific advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 38 (A)) and a second type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the first type of specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state shown in FIG. 38 (A)). The first type of specific advantageous gaming state is more advantageous than the normal advantageous gaming state in terms of executing the operation navigation, and the second type of specification is more advantageous than the normal advantageous gaming state. The advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and when the first lottery result is derived as the lottery result in the normal advantageous gaming state, the plurality of stop buttons are pressed. When only the game operated in the second operation mode is performed, the normal advantageous gaming state shifts to the second type specific advantageous gaming state without going through the first type specific advantageous gaming state. It is possible.

<Ending when ignoring operation navigation / Specific example>
FIG. 39B is a diagram showing a specific example of the ending when the operation navigation is ignored.

In the state shown in FIGS. 39 (B) and 39 (1), in the normal state, for example, the privilege push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode). It is in the state where the operation navigation that prompts is executed.

The AT1 transition rate (the winning probability of transitioning to the AT1 state by the transition lottery) in the same state is 20%.

The following states shown in FIGS. 39 (B) (2) to (B) (3) do not follow the operation navigation for prompting the player to perform a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), for example, forward push. It is a state in which the stop operation is performed by the operation (operation in the second operation mode).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (in this example, the "bell" on the winning line. -The mode in which the symbol combinations of "Bell-Bell" are aligned) will be stopped, and 12 medals will be paid out.

Further, in the same state, a plurality of reels stopped in the second stop mode (a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line) (not stopped in the first stop mode). Therefore, it has not shifted to the AT1 state (the first kind of specific advantageous gaming state).

The following FIGS. 39 (B) and (4) are states in which the normal state is changed to the AT2 state (second type of specific advantageous gaming state) of the bonus ending.

Although not shown, in the normal state shown in FIGS. (B) and (3), the player performs a stop operation by a forward push operation without following the operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation, and a plurality of reels are second. Since it stopped in the stop mode (a mode in which the "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line) (it was not stopped in the first stop mode), the AT2 state of the bonus ending (the second type) It has shifted to a specific advantageous game state).

On the other hand, FIGS. 39 (B) and 39 (5) show the normal ending AT2 from the normal state shown in FIGS. (B) and (2) via the AT1 state (first type specific advantageous gaming state) (not shown). It is a state that has transitioned to a state (a second type of specific advantageous gaming state).

In this example, the player performs a stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation, and multiple reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "bell-bell-replay" is aligned on the winning line. Since it stopped in the mode), it has shifted to the AT2 state of the normal ending (the second kind of specific advantageous gaming state) via the AT1 state (the first kind of specific advantageous gaming state).

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is difficult to alert the player because the operation is not an error, and the operation that does not follow the operation navigation unintentionally is continued. It is assumed that there is a player who does, but according to this example, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is possible to get a ball out. Since it is possible to shift to the gaming state, the player's motivation to play can be maintained until the player shifts to the second type of advantageous gaming state while relieving the player's operation error and the like.

As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) is a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states. And, a lottery means for drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of a winning combination and deriving the lottery result (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery), and a game value giving means for giving a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels. (For example, medal payout processing) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 36) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ), And the lottery result includes the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 37 (b)), and the lottery result is the first. In the case of the lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation), the plurality of reels are placed in the first stop mode (for example, "bell" on the winning line. -A mode in which the symbol combinations of "Bell-Replay" are aligned), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (for example, a forward push operation), the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode. (For example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line), and the game value-giving means is the plurality of reels when the lottery result is the first lottery result. Is stopped in the second stopping mode (for example, paying out 12 cards) more than the case where the game is stopped in the first stopping mode (for example, paying out one card). The plurality of gaming states include a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous in terms of execution of operation navigation than the normal state, and the advantageous state includes a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 38 (for example, FIG. 38). The normal state shown in A), the specific advantageous gaming state of the first type that can be transferred after the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT1 state shown in FIG. 38 (A)), and the identification of the first type. A second type of specific advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 38 (A)) that can be transferred after the advantageous gaming state is included, and the first type of specific advantageous gaming state is included rather than the normal advantageous gaming state. The state is an advantageous gaming state with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and the specific advantageous gaming state of the second type is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation than the normal advantageous gaming state. Yes, in the normal advantageous gaming state, the first lottery is the result of the lottery. When the selection result is derived and only the game in which the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode is performed, the first type of specific advantageous gaming state is changed from the normal advantageous gaming state. It is a gaming table characterized in that it is possible to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state of the second type without passing through.

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is difficult to alert the player because the operation is not an error, and the operation that does not follow the operation navigation unintentionally is continued. It is assumed that there is a player who does, but according to the game console according to this embodiment, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is possible to get a ball. Since it is possible to shift to the two types of advantageous gaming states, it is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play until the transition to the second type of advantageous gaming state, while relieving the player's operation error and the like.

Further, when a certain condition is satisfied, it is configured so as to be able to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state of the first type, the certain condition includes the satisfaction of a certain requirement, and the normal advantageous gaming state is satisfied. In a certain state (for example, a state in which the AT transition such as the 1G after the transition to the advantageous section is not determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are the first operation mode. The advantage for satisfying the certain requirement when the operation is performed in the above is higher than the advantage for satisfying the certain requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. It may be expensive.

Further, a notification means capable of performing notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation) is configured to be executable, and the notification means operates in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation that prompts the user (for example, the operation navigation that prompts the forward push operation) may be configured to be executable.

Further, the specific advantageous gaming state of the second type may be an advantageous gaming state that can be continued until the advantageous state ends.

Further, a counter relating to the specific advantageous gaming state of the first type is provided, and the count value of the counter can be updated every time one game is played in the advantageous state, and the first type in the advantageous state. If the operation according to the operation navigation of the above is not performed, the count display indicating the count value may not be updated.

Further, in the second type of specific advantageous gaming state, at least the first ending (for example, the normal ending shown in FIGS. 39 (B) and (5)) and the second ending different from the first ending are used. There is an ending (for example, an extra ending shown in FIGS. 39 (B) and (4)), and the amount of profit that can be given to the player in the first ending (for example, the number of games, the frequency of navigation (winning the push order bell)). The frequency of notification of time, etc.), the frequency of execution of full navigation, the amount of medal payout, etc.) are larger than the amount of profit that can be given to the player in the second ending, and in the advantageous state, the first operation navigation is performed. If the according operation is not performed, even if it shifts to the second ending without shifting to the first ending when shifting to the specific advantageous gaming state of the second type. good.

Further, in the second type of specific advantageous gaming state, a setting value suggestion display suggesting a set value (for example, a display suggesting that the set value is an even number (or an odd number), and the set value is a specific set value (for example). The display suggesting that the setting 6 etc.) can be displayed, and the frequency with which the setting value suggestion display is displayed in the first ending is such that the setting value suggestion display is displayed in the second ending. It may be more frequent than the frequency.

Further, in the second ending, the setting value suggestion display may not be displayed.

Further, the game console according to the present embodiment includes a control means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, a lottery means capable of drawing a lottery regarding internal winning of a winning combination, and a lottery means capable of deriving a lottery result. A game value-giving means for adding game value according to the stopping mode of the reels, and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels.
The lottery result includes the first lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are in the first operation mode. When the operation is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode. The game value-adding means is a case where the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode rather than the case where the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. Is configured to give a lot of the game value, and the advantageous state includes a normal advantageous gaming state, a first kind of specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the normal advantageous gaming state, and the first. The second type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the specific advantageous gaming state of the above type is included, and the first type of specific advantageous gaming state is better than the normal advantageous gaming state of the operation navigation. It is an advantageous gaming state with respect to execution, and the specific advantageous gaming state of the second type is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation than the normal advantageous gaming state, and in the normal advantageous gaming state, When the first lottery result is derived as the lottery result, when only the game in which the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode is performed, the first is from the normal advantageous gaming state. It is a game table characterized in that it is possible to shift to the second type of specific advantageous gaming state without going through the specific advantageous gaming state of the type.

Further, the game table according to the present embodiment is a control means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, and a game value adding means for adding game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels. , A plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a plurality of game value-added states in relation to the game value-giving status. A game table provided with a game value-adding state control means capable of setting one state from the above, and the advantageous state is a first that can be transferred to a normal advantageous game state and a normal advantageous game state after the normal advantageous game state. A type of specific advantageous gaming state and a second type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the first type of specific advantageous gaming state are included, and the first type is specified rather than the normal advantageous gaming state. The advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and the specific advantageous gaming state of the second type is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation than the normal advantageous gaming state. The second type of specific advantageous game state is a game state related to ending, and the plurality of game value-giving states are set in at least the normal advantageous game state, that is, the first game value-giving state. A state and a second game value granting state are included, and the game value giving state control means is said to be the first when the game value is given a certain situation (hereinafter referred to as "first situation"). The game value granting state can be set, and when the game value granting situation is different from the first situation (hereinafter referred to as "second situation"), the second game The value-adding state can be set, and the second situation is more advantageous to the player with respect to the game value-giving situation than the first situation, and a certain state in the normal advantageous game state. In the case where the second type of game value granting state is set, the second type of specific advantageous game state is changed from the normal advantageous game state to the first type of specific advantageous game state without going through the first type of specific advantageous game state. It is a game table characterized by being transferable.

<Bell guessing production / overview>
The game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) has a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, and an internal winning combination. A lottery means that can derive the lottery result by drawing a lottery (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout). Processing), a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and an effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device).

Further, the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 37 (b)) and a second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, FIG. 37). The normal push order bell 1) shown in (b) is included, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the operation in the first operation mode (for example, the reverse push operation) is performed, a plurality of reels are released. In the first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), and the lottery result is the first lottery result, in the second operation mode. When an operation (for example, a forward push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line), and the game value. The granting means is more likely to be stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). It is configured to give the game value of.

Further, when the lottery result is the second lottery result and the operation in the third operation mode (for example, the reverse push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are placed on the third stop mode (for example, the winning line). When the operation is performed in the fourth operation mode (for example, forward push operation) when the lottery result is the second lottery result, the operation is stopped at the mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned). A plurality of reels are stopped in a fourth stop mode (for example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line), and the game value-adding means is such that the plurality of reels are the third. It is configured to give more game value when stopped in the fourth stopping mode (for example, paying out 12 cards) than when stopping in the stopping mode (for example, paying out one card). ..

Further, the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is shown in a certain effect (for example, FIG. 39C) that can be displayed when the lottery result is the first lottery result or the second lottery result. The above-mentioned certain effect includes the case where the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result, and the case where the lottery result is the first lottery result. In the case of the second lottery result, when the plurality of reels are stopped in the fourth operation mode, it is an effect suggesting success (for example, an effect of displaying a character string of "success"), or The probability that the plurality of reels will be stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 5/6) rather than the probability that the plurality of reels will be stopped in the fourth stop mode (for example, 1/6). ) Is higher.

<Bell guessing production / specific example>
FIG. 39C is a diagram showing a specific example of the bell hitting effect.

In the state shown in FIGS. 39 (C) and 39 (1), in the AT1 state, for example, the normal push order bell 1 is won (the second lottery result is derived), and the operation navigation for promoting the bell hitting effect (certain effect) is performed. It is in the executed state.

In the bell hitting effect (certain effect) of this example, AT1 is performed when the correct answer pressing order operation (in this example, the pressing order operation of the LCR in which 12 medals are paid out) is performed using the liquid crystal display device 157. Notification suggesting that the state should be continued (in this example, the display including the character string "AT1 continues with the correct answer in the push order !!") and the push order guess that conceals all the correct push orders and makes the player guess. The display (in this example, "???" is displayed).

Although not shown, if the player's stop operation matches the correct push order operation (in this example, the LCR's push order operation) (when the player's stop operation hits), the winning line is displayed. The "Bell-Bell-Bell" symbol combination is complete (stops in the fourth stop mode), 12 medals are paid out, and a production suggesting success (for example, a display including the character string "success") is displayed. The production to be performed) is started.

In this example, when the normal push order bell 1 is won (the second lottery result is derived), the probability that the player's stop operation matches the correct push order operation (LCR push order operation) is It is 1/6.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIGS. It is in the state where the navigation is executed.

In the bell-hit effect (a certain effect) of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to operate the correct answer pressing order (in this example, any one of LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL, and RLC in which 12 medals are paid out). Notification suggesting that the AT1 state is continued when the push order operation) is performed (in this example, the display including the character string "AT1 continues with the correct push order !!") and all the correct answer push orders are displayed. The push order guessing display (in this example, "???" is displayed) that is concealed and made to hit the player.

Further, in this example, the player has a bell hitting effect (a certain effect) based on the normal push order bell 1 (second lottery result) or a bell hitting effect based on the privilege push order bell 6 (first lottery result). In the bell hitting effect (certain effect) based on the privilege push order bell 6 (first lottery result), the push order hit display mode is different so that it can be determined whether it is an effect (a certain effect). (In this example, the square line surrounding the "?" Is thickened). With such a configuration, it can be suggested that the first lottery result, which is advantageous for the player, has been won by the display mode of the bell hitting effect (a certain effect), and the expectation of the player is raised. Can be done.

Although not shown, the player's stop operation matches the correct push order operation (in this example, any of the LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL, and RLC push order operations) (the player's stop operation is If you win), the winning line will have a lineup of "bell-bell-bell" symbols (stopped in the second stop mode), 12 medals will be paid out, and a production that suggests success (for example). , The effect of displaying including the character string of "success") is started.

That is, in this example, when the normal push order bell 1 is won (the second lottery result is derived), the probability that the player's stop operation matches the correct push order operation (LCR push order operation) is It is 1/6, and when the privilege push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), the player's stop operation is the correct push order operation (LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL, RLC). Since the probability of matching the push order operation) is 5/6, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode rather than the probability that the plurality of reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode in a certain game. The probability of being stopped at is higher.

The game console according to the present embodiment performs an operation navigation in which one card combination is aligned, and as a result, the player is forced to miss the 12-card role, which may cause the player to feel dissatisfied. According to the above, since it is possible to execute a certain effect in relation to the operation navigation, it is possible to reduce the disgust toward the operation navigation and to eliminate the dissatisfaction of the player.

The second lottery result is not limited to the normal push order bell, and if there is a push order combination other than the first lottery result, the other push order combination may be applied.

39 (C) (3) is a diagram showing a modification 1 of the bell contact effect, and FIGS. (C) (4) and (5) are views showing a modification 2 of the bell contact effect. be.

In the bell-hit effect (a certain effect) described using FIGS. (C), (1), and (2) in the same figure, the push-order guess display (“???” ”) Is shown, but as in variant example 1, some non-correct answer pressing orders are disclosed, and some other correct answer pressing orders are concealed so that the player can hit them. In the production including the ordering display (in this example, the display of "x ??" which discloses that the first stop operation is not the left stop button and suggests that the second and third stop operations are concealed). There may be.

By performing such an effect, when the first lottery result is derived, the probability that the player's stop operation matches the correct answer pressing order operation can be increased, and the player's motivation to play can be improved. can.

Further, as in the modified example 2, a push order guessing display that discloses a part of the correct answer push order and conceals the other part of the correct answer push order and makes the player hit it (in this example, the first stop operation is performed). It may be an effect including the display of "? 1?") Disclosing that it is a middle stop button and suggesting that the second and third stop operations are concealed.

By performing such an effect, when the first lottery result or the second lottery result is derived, the probability that the player's stop operation matches the correct answer pressing order operation can be increased, and the player's game You can improve your motivation.

As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) is a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states. A lottery means for drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of a winning combination and deriving a lottery result (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery), and a game value giving means for giving a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels. (For example, medal payout processing) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 36) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ) And the effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.), and the lottery result includes the first lottery result (for example, the privilege pressing order shown in FIG. 37 (b)). A bell 6) and a second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, the normal push order bell 1 shown in FIG. 37 (b)) are included, and the lottery result is the first lottery result. In this case, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation pattern (for example, a reverse push operation), the plurality of reels have a certain winning combination (hereinafter referred to as "first winning combination"). It stops in the first stop mode that does not correspond to the winning of (for example, the mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation pattern (for example). , Forward push operation), the plurality of reels have a second stop mode corresponding to the winning of the first winning combination (for example, a "bell-bell-bell" symbol combination is aligned on the winning line. When the lottery result is the second lottery result and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the third operation pattern (for example, a reverse push operation), the plurality of reels are released. Stopped in a third stop mode (for example, a mode in which "bell-bell-replay" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line) that does not correspond to the winning of a certain winning combination (hereinafter referred to as "second winning combination"). Then, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the fourth operation pattern (for example, forward pressing operation), the plurality of reels correspond to the winning of the second winning combination (for example, the fourth stopping mode). , The number of operation patterns that become the second operation pattern is larger than the number of operation patterns that become the fourth operation pattern. In many cases, the game value-giving means is used when the lottery result is the first lottery result. Therefore, it is configured to impart more game value when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and the lottery result is the result of the lottery. In the case of the second lottery result, it is configured to give more game value when the plurality of reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the third stop mode. Then, the effect means can execute a certain effect (for example, the bell hit effect shown in FIG. 39C) when the lottery result is at least the first lottery result or the second lottery result. The certain effect configured and performed when the lottery result is the first lottery result is a successful effect when at least the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (eg, "" An effect of displaying including the character string "success"), and the certain effect executed when the lottery result is the second lottery result is such that at least the plurality of reels are in the fourth stop mode. It is a game table characterized by being a successful production when stopped.

Since the operation navigation is performed in which the roles of one card are aligned, and as a result, the player is forced to miss the role of 12 cards, the player may feel dissatisfied. Since it is possible to execute a certain effect in relation to the operation navigation, it is possible to reduce the disgust toward the operation navigation and to eliminate the dissatisfaction of the player.

The first winning combination and the second winning combination may be the same winning combination or different winning combinations. Further, the difference in the operation pattern is not limited to the order in which the stop buttons are pressed, and may be a difference in the stop timing of the stop buttons and the like. Therefore, for example, a stop operation (pressing) may be performed aiming at a specific symbol (for example, a red and blue symbol) on the reel, and in this case, for example, red-blue-blue are aligned. In some cases, a successful effect may be executed, and when red-red-blue are aligned, a successful effect may not be executed.

Further, the plurality of gaming states include a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous for displaying the operation navigation than the normal state, and the advantageous state includes the normal advantageous gaming state and the normal advantageous gaming state. A first type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred later is included, and when a certain condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first type of specific advantageous gaming state, and the certain condition includes the specific advantageous gaming state. Satisfaction of a certain requirement is included, and in a certain state in a normal advantageous gaming state and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated by the first operation pattern. The advantage for satisfying the certain requirement in the case of the above is higher than the advantage for satisfying the certain requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation pattern. May be.

Further, the certain effect is an effect that is started before the operation of the plurality of stop buttons is performed, and is an effect that causes the player to guess the success operation pattern of the plurality of stop buttons. It may be something.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the operation in the first operation mode (for example, a reverse push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are placed in the first stop mode (for example, on the winning line). The operation is performed in the second operation mode (for example, forward push operation) when the lottery result is the first lottery result. And the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-bell" are aligned on the winning line), and the game value-imparting means is such that the plurality of reels are the first. It is configured to impart more of the game value when stopped in the second stopping mode (for example, paying out 12 cards) than when stopping in one stopping mode (for example, paying out one card). When the operation in the third operation mode (for example, reverse push operation) is performed when the lottery result is the second lottery result, the plurality of reels are placed on the third stop mode (for example, on the winning line). When the operation is stopped at (a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned) and the operation in the fourth operation mode (for example, a forward push operation) is performed when the lottery result is the second lottery result. The plurality of reels are stopped in a fourth stop mode (for example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line), and the game value-imparting means is such that the plurality of reels are the third. It is configured to give more of the game value when stopped in the fourth stopping mode (for example, paying out 12 cards) than when stopping in the stopping mode of (for example, one payout). The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a certain effect that can be displayed when the lottery result is the first lottery result or the second lottery result (for example, the bell shown in FIG. 39C). Including the guessing effect), the certain effect includes a case where the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, and the lottery result is the second lottery result. In the case of a lottery result, when the plurality of reels are stopped in the fourth operation mode, the effect includes a display suggesting success (for example, a display including a character string of "success"). The probability that the plurality of reels will be stopped in the second stop mode (eg, 5 /) rather than the probability that the plurality of reels will be stopped in the fourth stop mode (for example, 1/6) in a certain game. 6) may be higher.

Further, a notification means capable of performing notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation) is configured to be executable, and the notification means operates in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation that prompts the user (for example, the operation navigation that prompts the forward push operation) may be configured to be executable.

Further, the plurality of gaming states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 38 (A)) and an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 38 (A)) which is more advantageous for the display of the operation navigation than the normal state. AT1 state, AT2 state) are included, and if the advantageous state has a sustainable right, the certain effect may be performed at least once in the advantageous state.

Further, the lottery result includes a third lottery result (for example, another push order combination) different from both the first lottery result and the second lottery result. It may be an effect that may be executed even when the lottery result is the third lottery result.

Further, the advantageous state includes the AT state, and during the period in which the advantageous state is not the AT state, the first operation navigation is executed when the lottery result is the first lottery result. It is possible, and in the period of the advantageous state and the AT state, when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the execution of the certain effect may be started.

Further, the game value-adding means is configured so as not to add the game value when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. It may be the one that has been added.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (4) / Overview>
The game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) has a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, and an internal winning combination. A lottery means that can derive the lottery result (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout). Processing), a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and an effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of executing a plurality of types of effects. , Speaker, etc.).

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege pushing order bell 6 shown in FIG. 37B), when the operation in the first operation mode (for example, the reverse pushing operation) is performed, a plurality of operations are performed. The reel is stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), and the second operation is performed when the lottery result is the first lottery result. When the operation in the mode (for example, the forward push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line). The game value-adding means is when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) rather than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). It is configured to give more of the game value.

Further, the first game (for example, a three-card bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, three cards) and the second number (for example, two cards) are bets on the game medium. The second game (for example, a two-card betting game) is configured to be feasible, and the first number and the second number are different numbers, and the first number is higher than the second game. The game is more advantageous for the player.

Further, the plurality of gaming states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 38 (A)) and an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 38 (A)) which is more advantageous for the display of the operation navigation than the normal state. The AT1 state and the AT2 state shown) are included, the first counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation counter shown in FIG. 39 (A) and the advantageous section counter) is provided, and one game is performed in the advantageous state. The count value (first count value) of the first counter can be updated for each time, and the second counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 41 (C) and 41 (D)) can be updated. (2 counters) are provided, and the count value (second count value) of the second counter can be updated each time one game is played in the advantageous state, and the plurality of counters are configured to be updatable in the advantageous state. When the reels are stopped in the first stop mode, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value can be updated, and the plurality of reels are said to be in the advantageous state. When not stopped in the first stop mode, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated.

Further, one of the plurality of types of effects is the first scene (for example, the scene 1 shown in FIG. 40 (A)) and the second scene (for example, the scene 2 shown in FIG. 40 (A)). It is an effect composed of a plurality of scenes including the above, and when the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed, the first game is described. When the execution of the effect of the second scene can be started and the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed, the second game is described. When the execution of the effect of the second scene is not started and then the execution of the first game is started, the execution of the effect of the second scene can be started in the first game. In the game after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. Even in this case (even if the plurality of reels are not stopped in the first stop mode), the execution of the effect of the second scene can be started in the game.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (4) / Specific example>
40 (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a specific example of advantageous section control (4) when the operation navigation is ignored, and FIG. It is a figure which showed the transition example of the scene of the interlocking production of.

Here, the interlocking effect is an effect that is continuously (or intermittently) executed over a plurality of games, and is composed of a plurality of scenes including the first scene and the second scene. For example, the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 40 (A) is composed of three scenes of scene 1, scene 2, and scene 3, and scene 2 further includes scene 2-1, scene 2-2, scene 2-3, and the like. It is composed of multiple scenes including.

In this example, when the execution of the three-card betting game (first game) is started after the game in which the production of the scene 1 (first scene) is performed, the scene 2 (second scene) is started in the game. Execution of the production of the scene) can be started. In addition, if the execution of the three-card betting game (first game) is started after the game in which the production of this scene 2 (first scene) is performed, the scene 3 (second scene) is started in the game. ) Production can be started.

That is, in this example, when the three-card betting game is continued during the execution of the interlocking effect, the scene of the interlocking effect is configured to proceed.

FIG. 40 (C) is a diagram showing a transition example of the scene of the interlocking effect when the two-sheet game is executed in the continuous effect.

In this example, when the execution of the two-card betting game (second game) is started after the game in which the production of the scene 1 (first scene) is performed, the scene 2 (second game) is started in the game. If the execution of the production of the scene) is not started and then the execution of the three-card betting game (first game) is started, the execution of the production of the scene 2 (second scene) is started in the game. It is possible.

In addition, if the execution of the three-card betting game (first game) is started after the game in which the production of this scene 2 (first scene) is performed, the scene 3 (second scene) is started in the game. ) Production can be started.

That is, in this example, when the two-card betting game is executed during the execution of the interlocking effect, the scene of the interlocking effect does not proceed. In addition, when a two-card betting game is executed during the execution of the interlocking effect, the next scene of the interlocking effect may be displayed for a moment.

FIG. 40B is a diagram showing a transition example of the scene of the interlocking effect when the operation navigation is executed in the continuous effect.

In the example shown in FIGS. (B) and (1), the execution of the three-card betting game (first game) is started in the game after the game in which the production of the scene 1 (first scene) is performed, and the scene. In addition to starting the execution of the 2-1 effect, for example, the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode) by winning the privilege push order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived). This is an example in which the player performs a stop operation according to an operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the execution of the effect of scene 2-2 is started triggered by the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the right stop button), and then the second stop operation (in this example, the middle stop button) is started. (Pressing operation of It has started.

Although not shown, in this example, since the player performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation for prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, "on the winning line". It will stop at the mode where the symbol combinations of "Bell-Bell-Replay" are aligned), and one medal will be paid out.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIGS. (B) and (2), the execution of the three-card betting game (first game) is started in the game after the game in which the production of the scene 1 (first scene) is performed. , The operation of starting the production of the scene 2-1 and, for example, winning the privilege push order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived) and prompting the reverse push operation (the operation in the first operation mode). This is an example in which the navigation is executed and the player performs a stop operation without following the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the execution of the effect of scene 2-2 is started triggered by the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the left stop button), and then the second stop operation (in this example, the middle stop button) is started. (Pressing operation of It has started. Further, in this example, since the visibility of the effect of the scene 2-4 is lowered, at least a part of the winning effect executed after the third stop operation is not executed during the effect of the scene 2-4. It is composed.

Although not shown, in this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation for prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (this example). Then, it stops at the mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-bell" are aligned on the winning line), and 12 medals are paid out.

As described above, in this example, the game is a game after the game in which the production of the first scene (scene 1 in this example) is performed, and the lottery result is the first lottery result (privilege in this example). In the case of the push order bell 6), the plurality of reels were not stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line) (operated by the player). Even in a game in which a stop operation is performed without following the navigation, it is possible to start executing the effect of the second scene (scene 2 in this example) in the game.

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is difficult to call attention to the player because the operation is not an error, and the player is given attention or continuously produced as a penalty. There is a risk of embarrassing the player if the player is interrupted, but according to this example, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the continuous production should proceed. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be maintained without making the player feel embarrassed.

As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) is a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states. A lottery means for drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of a winning combination and deriving the lottery result (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery), and a game value giving means for giving a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels. (For example, a medal payout process) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 36) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ) And an effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, and the lottery result includes the first lottery result (for example, FIG. 37). When the privilege push order bell 6) shown in (b) is included and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation). Is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), and the plurality of stop buttons are in the second operation mode. When the operation in (for example, forward push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line), and the above-mentioned In the case where the lottery result is the first lottery result, the game value-giving means has the second stop rather than the case where the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). A first game in which the game is configured to give more of the game value when stopped in an embodiment (for example, withdrawal of 12 cards), and the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, 3 cards). (For example, a three-card betting game) and a second game (for example, a two-card betting game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, two cards) can be executed. The number of the reels and the second number are different numbers, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the plurality of game states are in the normal state ( For example, the normal state shown in FIG. 38 (A) and the advantageous state state (for example, the AT1 state and AT2 state shown in FIG. 38 (A)) which are more advantageous for the display of the operation navigation than the normal state are included. A first counter regarding an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation counter shown in FIG. 39 (A) or an advantageous section counter) is provided, and the advantageous state is described. Each time one game is played in the state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value"). ) Is updatable, and the second counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 41 (C) and 41 (D), the counter for counting the remaining number of ATs during AT, and the AT transition). (Counter that counts a certain count value for) is provided, and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as “second count value”) is updated every time one game is played in the advantageous state. It is possible to update the count values of both the first count value and the second count value when the execution of the first game is started in the advantageous state. When the execution of the second game is started in the advantageous state, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated, and the advantage The state includes a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the normal advantageous gaming state, and is more than the normal advantageous gaming state. The specific advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and when a certain condition is satisfied, the specific advantageous gaming state can be transitioned to the specific advantageous gaming state. , Satisfaction of the first requirement (for example, when the lottery for transition to AT1 state or AT2 state is won), and a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, AT transition such as 1G after transition to advantageous section). Is not determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode for satisfying the first requirement. The advantage is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, and one of the plurality of types of effects is produced. Is an effect composed of a plurality of scenes including the first scene (for example, the scene 1 shown in FIG. 40 (A)) and the second scene (for example, the scene 2 shown in FIG. 40 (A)). When the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the execution of the production of the second scene can be started in the first game. If the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the execution of the production of the second scene is not started in the second game, and the next When the execution of the first game is started, the first game is performed in the first game. When the execution of the effect of the second scene can be started and the game is after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of The game table is characterized in that even when the stop button is operated in the second operation mode, the execution of the effect of the second scene can be started in the game.

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is difficult to call attention to the player because the operation is not an error, and the player is given attention or continuously produced as a penalty. There is a risk of embarrassing the player when the game is interrupted, but according to the game console according to the present embodiment, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is continuous. By advancing the production, the player's willingness to play can be maintained without making the player feel embarrassed.

Further, a notification means capable of performing notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation) is configured to be executable, and the notification means operates in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation that prompts the user (for example, the operation navigation that prompts the forward push operation) may be configured to be executable.

Further, when the operation according to the first operation navigation is not performed in the advantageous state, only the count display (for example, the ceiling residual counter display) indicating the first count value can be updated. The count display indicating the second count value may not be updated.

Further, the specific advantageous gaming state includes a first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state), and is configured to be able to execute the second operation navigation in the first specific advantageous gaming state. When the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode, the effect corresponding to each operation can be executed, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. In this case, the effect corresponding to each operation may not be executed.

Further, in the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed in the second game and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, when one medal is paid out). Even if there is, it may be possible to start a display suggesting the total amount of the game value given in the advantageous state (for example, display of an image including the character string "500 pieces acquired").

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (5) / Overview>
The game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) has a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states, and an internal winning combination. A lottery means that can derive the lottery result by drawing a lottery (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery) and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, a medal payout). Processing), a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of executing a plurality of types of effects. Etc.) and.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege pushing order bell 6 shown in FIG. 37B), when the operation in the first operation mode (for example, the reverse pushing operation) is performed, a plurality of operations are performed. The reel is stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), and the second operation is performed when the lottery result is the first lottery result. When the operation in the mode (for example, the forward push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line). The game value-adding means is when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) rather than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). It is configured to give more of the game value.

Further, the first game (for example, a three-card bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, three cards) and the second number (for example, two cards) are bets on the game medium. The second game (for example, a two-card betting game) is configured to be feasible, and the first number and the second number are different numbers, and the first number is higher than the second game. The game is more advantageous for the player.

Further, the plurality of gaming states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 38 (A)) and an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 38 (A)) which is more advantageous for executing the operation navigation than the normal state. The AT1 state shown) is included, and a first counter related to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation counter shown in FIG. 39 (A) or an advantageous section counter) is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, The count value (first count value) of the first counter can be updated, and the second counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 41 (C) and 41 (D)) can be updated. ), And the count value (second count value) of the second counter can be updated every time one game is played in the advantageous state, and the plurality of reels are said to be in the advantageous state. When stopped in the first stop mode, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updatable, and the plurality of reels are the first in the advantageous state. When not stopped in the stop mode, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a specific display (for example, a caution display shown in FIG. 41 (A)) that is a display relating to attention to the player and is not an effect display, and is the first display. When the second game is played, the specific display is displayed, and in a certain state in the normal advantageous game state and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are the second. Even when the operation is performed in the operation mode of the above, the specific display is configured not to be displayed.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (5) / Specific example>
41 (A) and 41 (B) are diagrams showing a specific example of advantageous section control (5) when the operation navigation is ignored.

As shown in the figure (A), in this example, in the three-card betting game (first game), a warning display (a certain display) suggesting to the player that the two-card betting game is displayed is displayed. However, in the two-card betting game (second game), it is possible to display a warning display (a certain display).

Further, in the example shown in the figure (B), the execution of the two-card betting game (second game) is started in the game after the game in which the production of the scene 1 (first scene) is performed, for example, a privilege. The push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), the operation navigation for prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode) is executed, and the player performs the reverse push operation (first operation). This is an example of performing a stop operation without following the operation navigation that prompts the operation).

In this example, a warning display (a certain display) is displayed triggered by the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the left stop button), and then the second stop operation (in this example, the middle stop button) is displayed. A warning display (a certain display) is displayed as a trigger (pressing operation of the right stop button), and then a warning display (a certain display) is displayed triggered by a third stop operation (in this example, a pressing operation of the right stop button). it's shown. Further, in this example, after the third stop operation, the warning display (a certain display) is erased, and the execution of the effect of the scene 1 is started.

On the other hand, although not shown, the execution of the three-card betting game (first game) is started, for example, the privilege pushing order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse pushing operation (first). When the operation navigation that prompts the operation in the operation mode of (1) is executed and the player performs the stop operation without following the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), the player is alerted. It is configured not to display the display (a certain display).

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is difficult to call attention to the player because the operation is not an error, and if the player calls attention, etc. Although it may make the player feel embarrassed, according to this example, it is possible to display a certain display (warning display) in the second game (two-card betting game) that requires attention. However, if the player does not follow the operation navigation, by not displaying a certain display (warning display), the player does not feel embarrassed and the player's motivation to play can be maintained. can.

As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) is a control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states. A lottery means for drawing a lottery regarding the internal winning of a winning combination and deriving the lottery result (for example, processing of a winning combination internal lottery), and a game value giving means for giving a game value according to a stop mode of a plurality of reels. (For example, a medal payout process) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 36) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ) And an effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, and the lottery result includes the first lottery result (for example, FIG. 37). When the privilege push order bell 6) shown in (b) is included and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation). When this is done, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line), and the plurality of stop buttons are in the second operation mode. When an operation (for example, a forward push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line), and the game value. In the case where the lottery result is the first lottery result, the granting means is in the second stop mode than in the case where the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). A first game (eg, 3 cards) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, 3 cards), which is configured to give more of the game value when stopped (for example, withdrawal of 12 cards). , A three-card betting game) and a second game (for example, a two-card betting game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, two cards) can be executed. And the second number are different numbers, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the plurality of game states are normal states (for example, for example). A normal state shown in FIG. 38 (A) and an advantageous state state (for example, the AT1 state and the AT2 state shown in FIG. 38 (A)) which are more advantageous for executing the operation navigation than the normal state are included, and the advantageous state is described. (For example, the high navigation counter shown in FIG. 39 (A) and the advantageous section counter) are provided with respect to the above-mentioned advantageous state. Each time one game is played, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value"). ) Is updatable, and the second counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 41 (C) and 41 (D), the counter for counting the remaining number of ATs during AT, and the AT transition). (Counter that counts a certain count value for) is provided, and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as “second count value”) is updated every time one game is played in the advantageous state. It is possible to update the count values of both the first count value and the second count value when the execution of the first game is started in the advantageous state. When the execution of the second game is started in the advantageous state, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated, and the advantage The state includes a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a specific advantageous gaming state that can be transferred after the normal advantageous gaming state, and is more than the normal advantageous gaming state. The specific advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and when a certain condition is satisfied, the specific advantageous gaming state can be transitioned to the specific advantageous gaming state. , Satisfaction of the first requirement (for example, when the lottery for transition to the AT1 state or AT2 state is won), a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and the lottery result is the first lottery result. In the case where the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode, the advantage for satisfying the first requirement is that the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. It is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement in the case of the above, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a specific display (for example, a display relating to attention to the player and not an effect display). , The alert display shown in FIG. 41 (A), the specific display is displayed when the second game is performed, and a certain state in the normal advantageous game state (for example, after the transition to the advantageous section). (A state in which the AT transition such as the 1Gth is not determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. Also, the game counter is configured so that the specific display is not displayed.

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is difficult to call attention to the player because the operation is not an error, and if the player calls attention, etc. There is a risk of embarrassing the player, but according to the game console according to this embodiment, there is a certain display (warning display) in the second game (two-card betting game) that requires attention. Although it is possible to display, if the player does not follow the operation navigation, a certain display (warning display) is not performed, so that the player does not feel embarrassed and the player's willingness to play. Can be sustained.

Further, a notification means capable of performing notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation) is configured to be executable, and the notification means operates in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation that prompts the user (for example, the operation navigation that prompts the forward push operation) may be configured to be executable.

Further, an effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects is provided, and one of the plurality of types of effects is the first scene (for example, the scene 1 shown in FIG. 40 (A)) and the second scene. (For example, it is an effect composed of a plurality of scenes including the scene 2 shown in FIG. 40 (A), and the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed. In that case, the execution of the effect of the second scene can be started in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed. In that case, the execution of the effect of the second scene is not started in the second game, and if the execution of the first game is started next, the first game is started. When the execution of the production of the second scene can be started and the game is after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of Even when the stop button is operated in the second operation mode, the execution of the effect of the second scene may be started in the game.

With such a configuration, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, by advancing the continuous production, the player does not feel embarrassed and the player's willingness to play is maintained. be able to.

Further, the specific advantageous gaming state includes a first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state), and is configured to be able to execute the second operation navigation in the first specific advantageous gaming state. When the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode, the effect corresponding to each operation can be executed, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. In this case, the effect corresponding to each operation may not be executed.

Further, in the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed in the second game and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, when one medal is paid out). Even if there is, it may be possible to start a display suggesting the total amount of the game value given in the advantageous state (for example, display of an image including the character string "500 pieces acquired").

FIG. 41 (C) is a diagram showing an example in which a three-card betting game is performed in the AT state in chronological order, and FIG. 41 (D) is a diagram showing an example in which a two-card betting game is performed in the AT state in chronological order. It is a figure shown.

In this example, the second state (AT state in this example) is an advantageous state, and the advantageous state is more advantageous to the player than the first state (normal state in this example). A first counter for the advantageous state (for example, the first counter shown in FIGS. 41 (C) and 41 (D), an advantageous section counter) is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the game is described. The count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as “first count value”) can be updated, and for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (C), the first game in the advantageous state. When the execution of (for example, a three-card betting game) is started, the count values of both the first count value and the count value related to the count display (for example, the ceiling balance counter, etc.) are updated. When the execution of the second game (for example, a two-card betting game) is started in the advantageous state, only the first count value is updated, and the count value related to the count display is not updated. It is configured as follows.

Further, in this example, the advantageous state is configured to be able to shift to any of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a certain advantageous gaming state. It is a state and includes a second counter for the certain advantageous state (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 41 (C) and 41 (D)), and each time one game is played in the first advantageous state. , The count value of the second counter (hereinafter, referred to as "second count value") can be updated, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is an image showing a certain value. (Hereinafter referred to as “first display”; for example, the first display d1 shown in FIGS. 41 (C) and 41 (D)), and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the display. A display including an image showing the updated value of a certain value (hereinafter referred to as “second display”; for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 41 (C)), wherein the certain value is the above-mentioned. It is a value related to the second count value, and is, for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (C), when the execution of the first game (for example, a three-card betting game) is started in the certain advantageous state. , The count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated so that the second display can be displayed in the first game, for example, FIG. 41 (D). As shown in the above, when the execution of the second game (for example, a two-card betting game) is started in the certain advantageous state, the first count value and the second count value are started. Only the first count value is updated so that the second display is not displayed in the second game.

<Modification example of advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation>
Next, a modified example of the advantageous section control when the operation navigation is ignored will be described with reference to FIG. 42.

FIG. 42A is a diagram showing a modification 1 of advantageous section control when the operation navigation is ignored.

In the state shown in FIGS. 42 (A) and 42 (1), in the AT1 state, for example, the privilege push order bell 5 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the RLC stop operation (operation in the second operation mode). ) Is being executed. The AT2 transition rate in the same state (the winning probability of transitioning to the AT2 state by the transition lottery. The advantage over satisfying the first requirement) is 30%.

Subsequently, the state shown in FIGS. 42 (A) and 42 (2) is a state in which the player performs the stop operation according to the operation navigation for prompting the stop operation (operation in the second operation mode) of the RLC.

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts the stop operation of RLC, the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, "bell-bell-bell" on the winning line. It will stop at the mode where the symbol combinations are aligned), and 12 medals will be paid out.

Further, in the same state, since a plurality of reels stopped in the second stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the "bell-bell-bell" symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line), the AT2 transition rate (first). (Advantage for satisfying the requirements) has increased from 30% to 31% (advantage is increasing).

On the other hand, the state shown in FIGS. 42 (B) and 42 (3) does not follow the operation navigation for prompting the player to stop the RLC (operation in the second operation mode), for example, a forward push operation (first operation). It is a state in which the stop operation is performed in the operation in the mode).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation for prompting the stop operation of the RLC, the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, "on the winning line". It will stop at the mode where the symbol combinations of "Bell-Bell-Replay" are aligned), and one medal will be paid out.

Also, in the same state, multiple reels stopped in the first stop mode (a mode in which the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-replay" are aligned on the winning line) (not stopped in the second stop mode). Therefore, the AT2 transition rate (advantage for satisfying the first requirement) has decreased from 30% to 29% (the advantage is low).

That is, in this example, when the stop operation is performed according to the operation navigation, the AT2 transition rate increases and the transition from the AT1 state to the AT2 state becomes easier, but the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation. In the case (when the operation navigation is ignored), the AT2 transition rate decreases, and it becomes difficult to shift from the AT1 state to the AT2 state.

As shown in FIGS. (A) and (4), the AT2 transition rate may be maintained (AT2 transition) when the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (when the operation navigation is ignored). You do not have to change the rate).

FIG. 42B is a diagram showing a modification 2 of the advantageous section control when the operation navigation is ignored.

In the example shown in FIGS. 42 (B) and 42 (1), for example, an operation navigation system in which the privilege pressing order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived) and the reverse pressing operation (operation in the first operation mode) is urged. Is an example in which the player performs a stop operation according to an operation navigation for prompting a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, a certain effect (in this example, a display including the character string "Good!" And an output of a sound effect) is started triggered by the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the right stop button). However, it is configured so that nothing is displayed when the second stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the middle stop button) and the third stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the left stop button) are triggered. is doing.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 42 (B) and 42 (2), for example, the privilege pushing order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse pushing operation (the operation in the first operation mode) is promoted. This is an example in which the operation navigation is executed and the player performs a stop operation without following the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the first stop operation (in this example, the left stop button is pressed), the second stop operation (in this example, the middle stop button is pressed), and the third stop operation (in this example, the right). It is configured so that nothing is displayed when the stop button is pressed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 42 (B) and 42 (3), for example, the privilege push order bell 5 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the RLC stop operation (operation in the first operation mode) is urged. This is an example in which the navigation is executed and the player performs the stop operation according to the operation navigation for prompting the stop operation (operation in the first operation mode) of the RLC.

In this example, the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the right stop button) is triggered to start the first effect (in this example, the display including the character string "OK!" And the output of the sound effect). Then, the second stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the left stop button) is used as a trigger for the second effect (in this example, the display including the character string "I'm good!" And the output of the sound effect). Is started, and then the third stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the middle stop button) is triggered by the third effect (in this example, the display including the character string "Yoshaa!" And the sound effect. Output) has started.

In the example shown in FIGS. 42 (B) and 42 (4), for example, the privilege push order bell 5 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the RLC stop operation (operation in the first operation mode) is urged. This is an example in which the navigation is executed and the player performs the stop operation without following the operation navigation for prompting the stop operation (operation in the first operation mode) of the RLC.

In this example, the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the right stop button) is triggered to start the first effect (in this example, the display including the character string "OK!" And the output of the sound effect). Then, triggered by the second stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the middle stop button), the second effect (in this example, the display including the character string "What are you doing!" And the sound effect? Output) is started, and then nothing is displayed when the third stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the left stop button) is triggered.

The game console according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine 100 according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the advantageous state is not limited to the AT1 state and the AT2 state, and may be another gaming state. Further, the first game is not limited to the three-card betting game, and the second game is not limited to the two-card betting game. Further, the first counter is not limited to the advantageous section counter, and may be another counter related to the advantageous state. Further, the warning display may be not by characters but by other images or the like. Further, the game value is not limited to a game medium such as a medal, and may be an advantageous privilege for the player (winning of an AT game, granting of an AT game, etc.).

Further, in the above embodiment, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. When the reels are stopped, the plurality of reels are configured to stop in the second stop mode, but the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode depending on the stop position of any one of the plurality of reels (for example, the left reel). It may be configured to determine whether to stop at or in the second stop mode. That is, the push order (for example, left middle right) is the same in both the first operation mode and the second operation mode, but the stop timing of the left reel may be different. Further, in the above embodiment, the first stop mode and the second stop mode are selected, but the third stop mode (for example, loss) may be used.

Further, the gaming table according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the "enclosed gaming machine" circulates and uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, the range of the game may be further expanded by applying the content described in one configuration to the other configurations among the plurality of configurations described in the examples.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Display window 130-132 Bet button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 157 Directional image display device 272,277 Speaker 420 Various lamps 300 Main control unit 400 1st sub-control unit 500 2nd sub-control Department

Claims (1)

Display means and
A door body that can be opened and closed on the front of the game console,
A detection means capable of detecting the open / closed state of the door body and
Operation means and
It is a game table equipped with
The detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state.
The detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to the open detection state when the door body is in the open state.
By performing a predetermined operation on the detection means, the detection state of the detection means is configured to be the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator.
When the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state and a certain operation is performed on the operation means, the management display can be started to be displayed.
When the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, even if the operation is performed on the operation means, the display of the management display cannot be started. And
Even if the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state, even if the operation is performed on the operation means in the state where the game value is applied. , It is configured so that the display of the management display cannot be started.
When the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state and the management display is displayed, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state. Even if the certain operation is not performed on the operating means, the management display can be continuously displayed.
A game table featuring that.

Images